JP6925095B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a multifunction device (generally also referred to as a "parrot machine") in which a pachinko machine and a rotating cylinder type gaming machine are fused. It is a thing.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the gaming area, and a game. Multiple entrances (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large winning opening, accessory) that are allowed to accept game media in the area and give benefits according to the acceptance of the game medium It has a winning opening), a V winning opening, etc.). Then, when the game medium is accepted at the reception, benefits (payout of the game medium, occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, etc.) are given, so that the game medium is sent to the reception for the player. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game medium so that it can be accepted.

In this type of game machine, game balls supplied from the game hall island facility where pachinko machines are installed are stored in a storage section of a ball tank, and the game balls stored in the storage section are prized by a payout device. I try to pay out as. (For example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-226648

An object of the present invention is to effectively utilize a game ball located outside the storage area.

The present invention
It has a storage area of a predetermined volume that can store the game balls supplied from the island equipment where the game machines are installed inside the partition wall of a predetermined height.
In a game machine in which a game ball stored in the storage area is paid out as a prize ball by a payout device via a predetermined ball passage.
The non-reservoir area outside the partition wall portion is provided with an induction inclined portion where game balls not stored in the storage area can be located.
The guided inclined portion is inclined downward from the front to the rear of the gaming machine so that the gaming ball located on the guided inclined portion does not stay on the guided inclined portion.
The ball passage has a rectifying unit that acts to reduce the number of stages of game balls that are distributed in a plurality of upper and lower stages.
The game ball that flows down due to the downward inclination of the induction inclined portion is configured so that it can fall into the ball passage from above the ball passage upstream of the rectifying portion.
The position where the gaming ball flowing down due to the downward inclination of the induction inclined portion falls into the ball passage and the rectifying portion are both located to the right of the storage area in the rear view of the gaming machine.
The induction inclined portion is provided at a position along the outside of the partition wall portion in a top view of the gaming machine.
The ball passage includes a main guide portion having a width corresponding to a predetermined number of rows.
The storage area has a main bottom surface portion that forms the main bottom surface of the storage area, and is characterized in that the game ball is dropped from the main bottom surface portion into the main guidance portion. ..
In addition, the present invention
It has a storage area of a predetermined volume that can store the game balls supplied from the island equipment where the game machines are installed inside the partition wall of a predetermined height.
In a game machine in which a game ball stored in the storage area is paid out as a prize ball by a payout device via a predetermined ball passage.
The non-reservoir area outside the partition wall portion is provided with an induction inclined portion where game balls not stored in the storage area can be located.
The guided inclined portion is inclined downward from the front to the rear of the gaming machine so that the gaming ball located on the guided inclined portion does not stay on the guided inclined portion.
The ball passage has a rectifying unit that acts to reduce the number of stages of game balls that are distributed in a plurality of upper and lower stages.
The game ball that flows down due to the downward inclination of the induction inclined portion is configured so that it can fall into the ball passage from above the ball passage upstream of the rectifying portion.
The position where the gaming ball flowing down due to the downward inclination of the induction inclined portion falls into the ball passage and the rectifying portion are both located to the right of the storage area in the rear view of the gaming machine.
The induction inclined portion is provided at a position along the outside of the partition wall portion in a top view of the gaming machine.
The ball passage includes a guide portion having a width corresponding to a predetermined number of rows outside the storage area.
The bottom surface of the storage area is composed of a plurality of bottom surfaces having different heights.
The bottom surface of the plurality of bottom surfaces is continuous with the bottom surface of the guide portion.
In addition, the means of another invention disclosed separately from the present invention are shown below.
Means 1: In a gaming machine
"A movable decorative body that can move from the standby position to a specific position,
It is arranged in front of the movable decorative body, and is provided with a transparent light guide plate capable of emitting and displaying a specific pattern for decorating the movable decorative body at the specific position. " It is a feature.

Here, as the "decoration" of the movable decorative body, "decoration imitating an item according to the concept of the gaming machine", "decoration imitating a character according to the concept of the gaming machine", and "decoration imitating the character according to the concept of the gaming machine" Examples include "decoration imitating a logo", "decoration with a geometric pattern", and "decoration imitating animals and plants". Examples of the outer peripheral shape of the movable decorative body include "triangle", "quadrangle", "hexagon", "octagon", "fan", "star", and "indeterminate form". Further, a plurality of movable decorative bodies may be provided, or only one may be provided.

Further, as the "standby position", "a position near the outer circumference of the game area where the game is performed", "a position around the effect display means on which the effect image is displayed", and "invisible from the player side (front)". "Position", etc. Further, examples of the "specific position" include "a position near the center of the game area where the game is performed", "a position in front (front) of the effect display means on which the effect image is displayed", and the like. Further, as the specific position, a plurality of positions may be set, or only one position may be set.

The "specific pattern" of the light guide plate includes "a pattern that decorates the front surface of the movable decorative body at a specific position", "a variable pattern that decorates the front surface of the movable decorative body at a specific position and changes the light emitting part", and ". "Outline pattern that decorates the outer circumference of the movable decorative body at a specific position", etc. can be mentioned. Further, the number of light guide plates may be only one or a plurality of light guide plates.

According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine emits a movable decorative body that can move from the standby position to a specific position and a specific pattern that is arranged in front of the movable decorative body and decorates the movable decorative body at the specific position. It is provided with a transparent light guide plate that can be displayed.

As a result, in the normal state, the movable decorative body is in the standby position, the specific pattern of the light guide plate is not displayed by light emission, and the light guide plate is in a transparent state. In this state, by moving the movable decorative body from the standby position to a specific position, the player can enjoy the movement and decoration of the movable decorative body. Furthermore, when the movable decorative body is in a specific position and the specific pattern of the light guide plate is light-emittingly displayed, the movable decorative body is decorated by the specific pattern, and the player is given an effect that the decoration of the movable decorative body is changed. I can show you. For this reason, it is possible to show the player a production that is clearly different from the light emission effect of the movable decorative body by the light emission of the LED provided in the conventional gaming machine, which strongly attracts the interest of the player. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player with the effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

In addition, when the movable decorative body is in the standby position, the specific pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, so that the player can enjoy the specific pattern, and the movable decorative body is made to emit light of the specific pattern. By moving the movable decorative body from the standby position to a specific position, it is possible to show the player an effect that the movable decorative body is integrated with the specific pattern, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Furthermore, by appropriately combining the movement of the movable decorative body and the light emission of a specific pattern on the light guide plate, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and reducing the interest. It can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the light guide plate may be capable of emitting and displaying a variable pattern whose light emitting portion changes as a specific pattern. As a result, the specific pattern that is emitted and displayed by the light guide plate is a variable pattern that changes the light emitting part. Therefore, by changing the light emitting part in the variable pattern, the decoration of the movable decorative body at the specific position can be variously arranged. Since it can be changed, it is possible to make the pattern of the effect by the movable decorative body various, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the light guide plate may be capable of emitting and displaying a contour pattern for decorating the outer periphery of the movable decorative body at a specific position as a specific pattern. As a result, the specific pattern emitted from the light guide plate is used as a contour pattern to decorate the outer circumference of the movable decorative body. Therefore, when the movable decorative body emits light when the movable decorative body is in a specific position, the contour pattern causes the movable decorative body to emit light. In addition to being able to emphasize the outer circumference, the contour pattern makes it look like the movable decorative body has become larger, which can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the movable decorative body may have a light emitting means for luminescent decoration of itself. As a result, when the light emitting means is made to emit light and the specific pattern of the light guide plate is emitted and displayed in a state where the movable decorative body is moved to a specific position, the specific pattern is indirect light, whereas the light emitting means is light close to direct light. Therefore, since the brightness of the part of the light emitting means is increased in the specific pattern, the specific pattern and the light emitting means can show the player a light emitting effect that could not be seen by the conventional gaming machine, and the player can see the light emitting effect. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, make the player think that there is something good, raise the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in the interest. Further, when the movable decorative body has a light emitting means, the movable decorative body itself can be made to emit light by emitting light, so that the movable decorative body shines brightly to make the movable decorative body stand out. It is possible to entertain the player with the luminous decoration of the movable decorative body as in the conventional gaming machine.

Further, a plurality of movable decorative bodies may be provided so as to move from the standby positions that are separated from each other to a specific position that gathers with each other to form a predetermined decoration mode. As a result, in the normal state, by setting a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the standby positions, the respective movable decorative bodies are separated from each other and dispersed. Can be decorated. Further, in the state of the standby position, since the plurality of movable decorative bodies are separated from each other, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to remind the player that the plurality of movable decorative bodies are aggregated to form a predetermined decorative mode. , The impact when gathered can be increased. Then, when the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved from the standby position to a specific position, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are aggregated to form a predetermined decorative mode, so that the appearance of the predetermined decorative mode surprises the player. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player. Then, when the specific pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light in a state where the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved to a specific position, the decoration of each of the plurality of movable decorative bodies can be changed. The decoration of a predetermined decoration mode formed can be changed, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be made to think that there is something good. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies that move from the standby position to a specific position are provided, each movable decorative body can be moved separately from the standby position to the specific position, so that one movable decorative body can be provided. Depending on whether or not the next movable decorative body moves to a specific position after moving the to a specific position, the player can be thrilled and excited, the player can be entertained, and each movable decoration can be enjoyed. By appropriately combining the timings at which the body moves to a specific position, it is possible to make the movable effect by a plurality of movable decorative bodies various, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and suppress the deterioration of the interest. ..

In addition, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are provided, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are set as specific positions, a first specific position in which they are densely assembled with each other, and a second specific position in which they are gathered at intervals from each other. It is desirable to be able to move to a position. As a result, when the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved from the standby position to the first specific position as the specific position, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are densely gathered to form a predetermined decorative mode (first decorative mode). Therefore, the appearance of the first decorative aspect can surprise the player. On the other hand, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved to a second specific position as a specific position, the plurality of movable decorative bodies adopt a decorative mode (second decorative mode) different from the first decorative mode according to the first specific position. To form, the appearance of the second decorative aspect can surprise the player. By moving a plurality of movable decorative bodies from the standby position to the first specific position or the second specific position, the first decorative mode and the second decorative mode can be shown to the player, and the player can perform various effects. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to make the player more entertaining, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are provided so as to be movable to a first specific position or a second specific position as a specific position, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are set as the first specific position. When the specific pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light when it is moved to a specific position or a second specific position, the decoration of the first decorative mode or the second decorative mode formed by a plurality of movable decorative bodies is changed. Because it is possible to show a wider variety of effects to the player, it is possible to make the player less bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. Can be done.

Further, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are provided, it is desirable that the light guide plate complements the plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific position by the light emitting display of the contour pattern. As a result, when the contour pattern is made to emit light on the light guide plate while the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved to a specific position, the space between the movable decorative bodies is complemented by the contour pattern. Therefore, the movable decorative body is complemented by the contour pattern. Since they can be connected to each other, it is possible to form one big decoration with multiple movable ornaments and contour patterns and give a strong impact to the player, and there may be something good for the player. It is possible to raise expectations for the game by making them think that there is no such thing.

Further, as described above, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are provided and the movable decorative bodies are complemented by the light emitting display of the contour pattern, the movable decorative bodies do not come into contact with each other and a gap is provided. Even if there is a gap, the gap can be hidden with a contour pattern, so it is not necessary to improve the movement accuracy of each movable decoration so that the movable decorations come into contact with each other, and the movement accuracy of the movable decoration is low. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the moving mechanism of the movable decorative body.

Further, the movable decorative body may be positioned near the outer periphery of the game area where the game is played when in the standby position, and may be located near the center of the game area when in the specific position. As a result, in the normal state, the movable decorative body is in the standby position near the outer periphery of the game area, the specific pattern of the light guide plate is not displayed by light emission, and the light guide plate is in a transparent state. The one arranged in the center of the game area (for example, the effect display means) can be visually recognized in a good state. In this state, the movable decorative body can be moved from the standby position to a specific position near the center of the game area, and since the movable decorative body is located near the center of the game area, the movable decorative body can be made to stand out and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain the movement and decoration of the movable decorative body. Then, when the specific pattern of the light guide plate is light-emitting and displayed while the movable decoration is in a specific position, the movable decoration is decorated by the specific pattern, and the decoration of the movable decoration is changed near the center of the game area. It is possible to show the player the effect to be performed, to attract the player's interest strongly, and to entertain the player with the effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when the specific position is set near the center of the game area, the specific pattern of the light guide plate that decorates the movable decorative body at the specific position is emitted and displayed near the center of the game area. Therefore, the specific pattern can be easily seen from the player side (front), and the player can entertain the specific pattern and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the movable decorative body may be positioned around the effect display means capable of displaying the effect image when in the standby position, and may be positioned in front of the front surface of the effect display means when in the specific position. As a result, in the normal state, since the movable decorative body is located around the effect display means, the movable decorative body can decorate the periphery of the effect display means, and the effect displayed on the effect display means can be decorated. The image can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, and the player can enjoy the directed image. On the other hand, when the movable decorative body is moved to a specific position, the effect image displayed on the effect display means is blocked by the movable decorative body, so that the player can be made aware of the movement of the movable decorative body. It can attract the player's attention to the movable ornament. Then, when the movable decorative body is in a specific position and the specific pattern of the light guide plate is light-emittingly displayed, the movable decorative body is decorated by the specific pattern, so that the player can change the decoration of the movable decorative body. It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the player with the production by the movable decorative body and the light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. can.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1.
"The light guide plate is
As the specific pattern, a variable pattern whose light emitting portion changes can be displayed by light emission. "

Here, as "variable patterns", "those that appear to move by displaying a plurality of different patterns in sequence" and "those that are completely independent of each other and do not appear to move even if they are displayed in sequence." , Etc. can be mentioned. Further, the variable pattern may be drawn on one light guide plate or may be drawn on a plurality of light guide plates.

According to the configuration of the means 2, the light guide plate is capable of displaying a variable pattern whose light emitting portion changes as a specific pattern.

As a result, the specific pattern that is emitted and displayed by the light guide plate is a variable pattern that changes the light emitting part. Therefore, by changing the light emitting part in the variable pattern, the decoration of the movable decorative body at the specific position can be variously arranged. Since it can be changed, it is possible to make the pattern of the effect by the movable decorative body various, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, as a variable pattern, when a plurality of different patterns are displayed in sequence to make them appear to move, the movement of the pattern can make the player feel strange, and the player's interest is strong. In addition to being attracted, the movement of the variable pattern can entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2.
"The light guide plate is
As the specific pattern, a contour pattern that decorates the outer periphery of the movable decorative body at the specific position can be luminescently displayed. "

According to the configuration of the means 3, the light guide plate is capable of emitting and displaying a contour pattern that decorates the outer periphery of the movable decorative body at a specific position as a specific pattern.

As a result, the specific pattern emitted from the light guide plate is used as a contour pattern to decorate the outer circumference of the movable decorative body. Therefore, when the movable decorative body emits light when the movable decorative body is in a specific position, the contour pattern causes the movable decorative body to emit light. In addition to being able to emphasize the outer circumference, the contour pattern makes it look like the movable decorative body has become larger, which can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3.
The movable decorative body is
It is characterized in that it has a light emitting means for luminescent decoration of itself.

Here, examples of the "light emitting means" include "full color LED", "monochromatic LED", "high brightness LED", "incandescent lamp", "organic EL", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 4, the movable decorative body is provided with a light emitting means for luminescent decoration of itself.

As a result, when the light emitting means is made to emit light and the specific pattern of the light guide plate is emitted and displayed in a state where the movable decorative body is moved to a specific position, the specific pattern is indirect light, whereas the light emitting means is light close to direct light. Therefore, since the brightness of the part of the light emitting means is increased in the specific pattern, the specific pattern and the light emitting means can show the player a light emitting effect that could not be seen by the conventional gaming machine, and the player can see the light emitting effect. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, make the player think that there is something good, raise the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since the movable decorative body itself can be made to emit light by emitting light from the light emitting means, the movable decorative body can be made to stand out by shining brightly, and the movable decorative body can be made to stand out like a conventional gaming machine. The luminous decoration of the body can be entertained by the player.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4.
"The movable decorative body is
It is characterized in that it is provided so as to move from the standby positions that are separated from each other to the specific positions that gather together to form a predetermined decorative mode. "

Here, examples of the "set" include "a plurality of movable decorative bodies in contact with each other", "a plurality of movable decorative bodies arranged in a predetermined shape at regular intervals", and the like. Be done.

Further, as the predetermined "decorative mode", "a mode in which a plurality of movable decorative bodies are gathered in a radial pattern", "a mode in which a plurality of movable decorative bodies are gathered in a grid pattern", and "a mode in which a plurality of movable decorative bodies are gathered in a grid pattern", and "a mode in which a plurality of movable decorative bodies are gathered in a grid pattern". "A mode in which the bodies are gathered in a cage shape", "A mode in which a plurality of movable decorative bodies are assembled in a ring shape", "A mode in which a plurality of movable decorative bodies are assembled in a straight line", "A mode in which a plurality of movable decorative bodies are assembled in a straight line", "A mode in which a plurality of movable decorative bodies are assembled in a straight line" "A mode in which the ornaments are gathered in a curved line", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 5, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are provided so as to move from the standby positions that are separated from each other to a specific position that gathers with each other to form a predetermined decoration mode.

As a result, in the normal state, by setting a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the standby positions, the respective movable decorative bodies are separated from each other and dispersed. Can be decorated. Further, in the state of the standby position, since the plurality of movable decorative bodies are separated from each other, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to remind the player that the plurality of movable decorative bodies are aggregated to form a predetermined decorative mode. , The impact when gathered can be increased. Then, when the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved from the standby position to a specific position, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are aggregated to form a predetermined decorative mode, so that the appearance of the predetermined decorative mode surprises the player. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player. Then, when the specific pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light in a state where the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved to a specific position, the decoration of each of the plurality of movable decorative bodies can be changed. The decoration of a predetermined decoration mode formed can be changed, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be made to think that there is something good. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since a plurality of movable decorative bodies that move from the standby position to the specific position are provided, each movable decorative body can be moved separately from the standby position to the specific position. After moving the movable decoration to a specific position, depending on whether or not the next movable decoration moves to a specific position, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained and each. By appropriately combining the timing at which the movable decorative body of the above moves to a specific position, it is possible to make the movable effect by the plurality of movable decorative bodies various, and it is difficult for the player to get bored and the deterioration of the interest is suppressed. be able to.

Means 6: In the configuration of means 5,
"The plurality of movable ornaments are
As the specific position, it is possible to move to a first specific position that is densely assembled with each other and a second specific position that is gathered at a distance from each other. "

According to the configuration of the means 6, a plurality of movable ornaments can be moved to a first specific position where they are densely assembled with each other and a second specific position where they are gathered at intervals from each other as specific positions. It is something like that.

As a result, when the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved from the standby position to the first specific position as the specific position, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are densely gathered to form a predetermined decorative mode (first decorative mode). Therefore, the appearance of the first decorative aspect can surprise the player. On the other hand, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved to a second specific position as a specific position, the plurality of movable decorative bodies adopt a decorative mode (second decorative mode) different from the first decorative mode according to the first specific position. To form, the appearance of the second decorative aspect can surprise the player. By moving a plurality of movable decorative bodies from the standby position to the first specific position or the second specific position, the first decorative mode and the second decorative mode can be shown to the player, and the player can perform various effects. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to make the player more entertaining, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, when the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved to the first specific position or the second specific position as specific positions, when the specific pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, the first movable decorative body formed by the plurality of movable decorative bodies is formed. Since the decoration of the decoration mode and the decoration of the second decoration mode can be changed, a wider variety of effects can be shown to the player, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Means 7: In the configuration of means 5 or means 6,
"The light guide plate is
By displaying the contour pattern by light emission, the space between the plurality of movable decorative bodies at the specific position is complemented. "

According to the configuration of the means 7, in the light guide plate, the space between the plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific position is complemented by the light emitting display of the contour pattern.

As a result, when the contour pattern is made to emit light on the light guide plate while the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved to a specific position, the space between the movable decorative bodies is complemented by the contour pattern. Therefore, the movable decorative body is complemented by the contour pattern. Since they can be connected to each other, it is possible to form one big decoration with multiple movable ornaments and contour patterns and give a strong impact to the player, and there may be something good for the player. It is possible to raise expectations for the game by making them think that there is no such thing.

Further, since the space between the movable decorative bodies can be complemented by the light emitting display of the contour pattern, even if the movable decorative bodies do not come into contact with each other and there is a gap, the gap can be hidden by the contour pattern. Therefore, it is not necessary to improve the moving accuracy of each of the movable decorative bodies so that the movable decorative bodies come into contact with each other, and the moving accuracy of the movable decorative body can be lowered, which increases the cost of the moving mechanism of the movable decorative body. It can be suppressed.

Means 8: In any one of the configurations from means 1 to means 7,
"The movable decorative body is
At the standby position, it is located near the outer periphery of the game area where the game is played, and at the specific position, it is located near the center of the game area. "

Here, as the "game", "a game medium aiming at a predetermined receiving port (for example, a starting port, a variable starting port, etc.) where a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous is performed. When a special lottery result is drawn in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by receiving a game medium into a predetermined reception, a specific reception (for example, variable) that pays out a predetermined number of game media by accepting the game medium Since the winning opening, the big winning opening, the winning opening for the character, etc.) are opened, the entrance where the game medium is driven in aiming at a specific entrance "and the entrance (the entrance where the privilege including the payout of the game medium is given" For example, a game in which a game medium is driven in aiming at a general winning opening, a starting opening, a large winning opening, a character winning opening, a V winning opening, etc. After the plurality of provided symbol rows (for example, the rotating body) are variablely displayed (for example, rotated), the variable display of each symbol row so as to be a combination of symbols to which a privilege including payout of the game medium is given. "A game to stop the game", etc. Examples of the above-mentioned "game medium" include "spherical ones (game balls)", "disk-shaped ones (medals)", and the like.

In addition, as the "game area" where the game is performed, there are a plurality of entrances where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player and a privilege including the payout of the game medium is given according to the acceptance of the game medium. Each has multiple symbols, and each is rotated by the player's start operation triggered by the input of the game medium, and the combination of symbols stopped by the player's stop operation. An area in which a plurality of rotating fuselage bodies are arranged to which a privilege including a payout of a game medium is given according to the above, and the like can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 8, the movable decorative body is positioned near the outer periphery of the game area where the game is played when in the standby position, and is located near the center of the game area when in the specific position.

As a result, in the normal state, the movable decorative body is in the standby position near the outer periphery of the game area, the specific pattern of the light guide plate is not displayed by light emission, and the light guide plate is in a transparent state. The one arranged in the center of the game area (for example, the effect display means) can be visually recognized in a good state. In this state, the movable decorative body can be moved from the standby position to a specific position near the center of the game area, and since the movable decorative body is located near the center of the game area, the movable decorative body can be made to stand out and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain the movement and decoration of the movable decorative body. Then, when the specific pattern of the light guide plate is light-emitting and displayed while the movable decoration is in a specific position, the movable decoration is decorated by the specific pattern, and the decoration of the movable decoration is changed near the center of the game area. It is possible to show the player the effect to be performed, to attract the player's interest strongly, and to entertain the player with the effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate. The decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, since the specific position is near the center of the game area, the specific pattern of the light guide plate that decorates the movable decorative body at the specific position is emitted and displayed near the center of the game area. The specific pattern can be easily seen from the front), and the player can entertain the specific pattern and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Means 9: In a gaming machine
"From the standby positions that are separated from each other near the outer periphery of the game area where the game is performed, the first specific positions that gather together near the center of the game area to form a predetermined decorative mode and are densely gathered with each other. , And a plurality of movable decorative bodies that are movable to a specific position of a second specific position that is gathered at a distance from each other and that has a light emitting means for illuminating and decorating itself.
A variable pattern that is arranged in front of the plurality of movable decorations and that decorates the plurality of movable decorations at the specific positions and changes the light emitting portion, and complements the movable decorations at the specific positions. It is provided with a transparent light guide plate capable of emitting and displaying a specific pattern of a contour pattern for decorating the outer periphery of the movable decorative body. "

According to the configuration of the means 9, in the gaming machine, from the standby positions that are separated from each other in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gaming area where the game is played, they gather together in the vicinity of the center of the gaming area to form a predetermined decorative mode, and form a predetermined decoration mode with each other. It is possible to move to the first specific position that is densely assembled and the specific position of the second specific position that is gathered at a distance from each other, and also has a light emitting means for illuminating and decorating itself. A variable pattern that is arranged in front of the plurality of movable ornaments and that decorates the plurality of movable ornaments at a specific position and changes the light emitting part, and the movable ornaments at a specific position. It is characterized in that it is provided with a contour pattern that complements the space and decorates the outer periphery of the movable decorative body, and a transparent light guide plate that can emit and display a specific pattern.

As a result, in a normal state, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in a standby position in which the plurality of movable decorative bodies are dispersed apart from each other in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area. It is possible to decorate the vicinity of the outer circumference, the specific pattern of the light guide plate is not displayed by light emission, the light guide plate is in a transparent state, and it is arranged in the center of the game area (for example, an effect display means). ) Can be visually recognized in good condition. Further, in the state of this standby position, since the plurality of movable decorative bodies are separated from each other, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are gathered at the first specific position or the second specific position as the specific position to perform a predetermined decoration mode. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recall the formation, and it is possible to increase the impact when gathered. In this normal state, when the plurality of movable decorations are moved from the standby position to the first specific position or the second specific position, the plurality of movable decorations gather in the vicinity of the center of the game area to form a predetermined decoration mode. Since (the first decorative mode and the second decorative mode) are formed, the appearance of a predetermined decorative mode can surprise the player and strongly attract the interest of the player.

Then, when the variable pattern is made to emit light as the specific pattern of the light guide plate in the state where the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved to the first specific position or the second specific position, the variable pattern is used to decorate each of the plurality of movable decorative bodies. It can be changed, and the decoration of the first decorative mode and the second decorative mode formed by the plurality of movable decorative bodies can be variously changed by changing the light emitting portion in the variable pattern. Therefore, it is possible to make various patterns of production by the movable decorative body, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, which is good for the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player in the game by making him think that there may be a case.

On the other hand, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved to the first specific position or the second specific position and the contour pattern is made to emit light as the specific pattern of the light guide plate, the outer periphery of the movable decorative body can be emphasized by the contour pattern. It is possible to make the movable decorative body look larger by the contour pattern, and since the movable decorative body can be connected to each other by the contour pattern, one large decoration is formed by the plurality of movable decorative bodies and the contour pattern. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to make the player think that there is something good, and to raise the expectation for the game.

In addition, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in the standby position, a variable pattern or a contour pattern is emitted as a specific pattern of the light guide plate, and the specific position is near the center of the game area. Since the specific pattern (variable pattern or contour pattern) of the light guide plate that decorates the display is emitted and displayed near the center of the game area, the variable pattern or contour pattern can be visually recognized from the player side (front) in good condition. It is possible to entertain the player with a variable pattern or a contour pattern. Then, when a plurality of movable decorative objects are moved from the standby position to a specific position (first specific position or second specific position) while the variable pattern or contour pattern is made to emit light, the plurality of movable decorative objects become variable patterns or. Since it is possible to show the player an effect that is integrated with the contour pattern, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved to a specific position and the light emitting means is made to emit light and the specific pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, the specific pattern is indirect light, whereas the light emitting means is close to direct light. Since it is light, the brightness of the part of the light emitting means is high in the specific pattern, so that the player can see the light emitting effect that could not be seen by the conventional game machine by the specific pattern and the light emitting means. In addition to being able to give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the movable decorative body itself can be made to emit light by emitting light from the light emitting means, the movable decorative body can be made to stand out by shining brightly, and the movable decorative body can be made to stand out like a conventional gaming machine. The luminous decoration of the body can be entertained by the player.

In addition, since a plurality of movable decorative bodies that move from the standby position to a specific position (first specific position or second specific position) are provided, each movable decorative body is moved separately from the standby position to the specific position. Therefore, after moving one movable decoration body to a specific position, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the next movable decoration body moves to a specific position. It is possible to entertain the player, and by appropriately combining the timings at which each movable decorative body moves to a specific position, it is possible to make the movable effect by the plurality of movable decorative bodies various, and to make the player It is possible to prevent the person from getting bored and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, various effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining the movement of a plurality of movable decorative bodies, the light emission of a specific pattern on the light guide plate, and the light emission of the light emitting means. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the light emitting display of the contour pattern of the light guide plate complements the gaps between the movable decorative bodies, even if the movable decorative bodies do not abut against each other and there is a gap, the gap is contoured. Since it can be hidden by a pattern, it is not necessary to improve the movement accuracy of each movable decoration so that the movable decorations come into contact with each other, and the movement accuracy of the movable decoration can be lowered. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the device.

Means 10: In any one of means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine
The game area where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player,
A plurality of receptions arranged in the game area and capable of accepting game media, and
The pachinko machine is provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the game medium into the reception port.

Here, as the "reception port", "a general winning opening that is always open in the game area" and "an advantageous game state that is always open in the game area and is advantageous to the player by accepting the game medium". "Starting winning opening (starting opening)" where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate Variable winning openings (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.) that can be accepted, "ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game medium passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium can be used in a specific area (for example, a gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area, such as a variable winning opening (variable starting port, accessory winning opening, etc.) that can accept the game medium. Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by passing, the game medium can be accepted, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not the acceptance of the game medium causes an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage. "Winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning opening that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game medium accepted in the accessory winning opening is sorted and accepted by the sorting means", " Examples of the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous include a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to accept the game medium.

Further, as the "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means". The special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the stop-displayed special symbols and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result and the advantageous gaming state in the special lottery result display means. When the result of the special lottery to be generated is displayed, the large winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state. When the distribution means for distributing the game medium received in the mouth and the game medium distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning opening, the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, which is advantageous for the player. It has an advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state (so-called honey machine), and has a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening, and is drawn by accepting a game medium to the starting opening. Depending on the result of the special lottery, the large winning opening or the special winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium accepted in the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening or the large winning opening is designated. A device provided with an advantageous gaming state generating means (so-called multifunction device) that opens and closes in the pattern of the above to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage. "

According to the configuration of the means 10, a plurality of gaming machines are arranged in the gaming area in which the gaming medium is driven by the operation of the player, and the receiving entrance where the gaming medium can be received, and the game to the receiving entrance. It is a pachinko machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the medium. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

It is desirable that the effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate is executed by receiving the game medium driven into the game area at the reception port. As a result, when the game medium is accepted into the entrance, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and the movable decorative body and the light guide plate are used to perform the effect. Therefore, the entrance is opened by entertaining the player. It is possible to make it easier to continue driving the target game medium, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, a special lottery is conducted to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and the drawn special lottery result is presented to the player when suggested to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate may be executed. As a result, the effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate is executed, so that the player can be entertained by giving a strong impact to the player due to the above-mentioned action and effect. The lottery result can make the player think that an advantageous gaming state occurs (for example, "big hit"), which raises the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state and suppresses the decline in interest. Can be made to. In addition, as described above, by performing the effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate, it is possible to show the player an effect with a higher effect, so that the player is suggested to the result of the special lottery. (For example, reach production) can be suitably used, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Means 11: In any one of means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine
Multiple fuselage bodies, each with multiple symbols,
A start operation unit that rotates the plurality of rotating bodies by operating the player after the game medium is inserted, and a start operation unit.
A plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and
A slot machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating fuselage that has been rotated and stopped by a player operating a plurality of the stop operation units. It is characterized by being.

Here, the "slot machine" includes "a machine in which the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game" and "a plurality of rotating bodies". An internal lottery is executed when the rotation starts, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of the stop symbols and the result of the lottery internal lottery is given. ”,“ The effective line for determining the combination of the stop symbols is fixed. It has been done ”, etc. The "privileges" include "Big Bonus (BB)", "Regular Bonus (RB)", "Cherry Rush Bonus (CRB)", "Replay", "Long Replay Time (LRT)", and "Assist Time (Assist Time). AT) ”, etc.

According to the configuration of the means 11, the gaming machine is operated by a plurality of rotating bodies, each of which has a plurality of symbols, and by the player after the game medium is loaded, so that the starting operation unit rotates the plurality of rotating bodies. According to the combination of a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating cylinders and a stop symbol by all the rotating cylinders whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units respectively. It is a slot machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachislot machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

The effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate is when the combination of symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combination symbols (so-called reach). , As one of the effects presented to the player, the effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate may be executed. As a result, the effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate is executed, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to win the winning combination. Further, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate may be executed, and thereby the effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate is executed. , Since it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, when the player is stopped at a specific combination of symbols, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state occurs (for example, "BB"). It is possible to raise the expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and suppress the decline in interest. Further, as described above, by executing the effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate, it is possible to show the player an effect with a higher effect effect, so that the player is suggested to the lottery internal lottery. It can be suitably used for the production, and can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Means 12: In any one of means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine
It is characterized by being a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, the "fusion machine", which is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols according to the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are loaded. After that, the fluctuation of the symbol sequence is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stop symbols, and a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, for example). , Advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time.

According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine are fused, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

The effect of the movable decorative body and the light guide plate is when the combination of symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combination symbols (so-called reach). , As one of the effects to be presented to the player, the effect by the movable decorative body and the light guide plate may be executed, or when the lottery result of the internal lottery is the winning combination, the movable decorative body and the light guide plate are displayed. The effect of the above may be executed, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

According to the present invention, a game ball located outside the storage area can be effectively utilized.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotary drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit and looked at from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front lower part. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the back lower part. It is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 101 (a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) viewed from the front by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame is distributed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which shows the vicinity of a tank rail enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board which made the game panel opaque in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel is transparent. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball is distributed, and the obstacle nail by making the game panel opaque. It is a front view which shows the vicinity of the attacker unit in the game board enlarged. It is a front view of the front component and a game panel in a game board. It is a perspective view which looked at the front component and a game panel from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the front component and a game panel from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at from the front by disassembling the front component and a game panel. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the front component and a game panel and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the game panel shown with the board cover removed, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the lower panel decorative board in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the decorative pattern of a game panel, a front component, and a table unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the relationship between a decorative pattern in a game panel and an obstacle nail. (A) is a front view of a panel board in which a decorative pattern different from that of FIG. 120 is formed, and (b) is a front view showing the panel board of (a) together with a front unit. It is a front view which shows the nail adjustment film for adjusting the obstacle nail planted in the game panel. It is a front view of the main body frame which shows with the game board attached. (A) is an enlarged explanatory view showing a state before the nail adjusting film is attached to the game board, and (b) is an enlarged explanatory view showing a state where the nail adjusting film is attached to the game board. It is a front view of the front production unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the 1st picture is luminescent decoration in the front production unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the 2nd pattern is luminescent decoration in the front effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the 2nd picture of the front effect unit different from this embodiment was light-emitting and decorated. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at from the front by disassembling the under-back movable decorative body provided in the under-back effect unit in the back unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the movable under-back decorative body provided in the under-back effect unit as viewed from behind by disassembling it. It is a front view which shows the movement of the movable decorative body under the back. It is a front view which shows the movement of the back left movable decorative body of the back left production unit in a back unit. From the normal state, raise the back lower movable decoration of the back right production unit from the standby position and move the back lower moving arm to the back left lower movable decoration of the back left production unit and the back right lower movable decoration of the back right production unit. The height is set, and the back upper movable decoration of the back right production unit is lowered from the standby position, and the back upper moving arm is the same as the back upper left movable decoration of the back left production unit and the back upper right movable decoration of the back right production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state of height. FIG. 136 shows a state in which the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the upper left movable decorative body on the back, the lower left movable decorative body on the back, the upper right movable decorative body on the back, and the lower right movable decorative body on the back are rotated. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back left moving arm of the back left effect unit and the back right moving arm of a back right effect unit to the second state from a normal state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back upper left movable decoration body, the back left lower movable decoration body, the back upper right movable decoration body, and the back right lower right movable decoration body from the state of FIG. 138 to the second state. From the normal state, the back left moving arm is moved to the right and the back right moving arm is moved to the left, and the back upper left movable decoration and the back right lower movable decoration, and the back left lower movable decoration and the back upper right movable decoration are moved. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the effect image is displayed on the effect display device after rotating the body so that it faces each other. From the normal state, the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back right lower movable decoration were moved to the second united position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state. From the state shown in FIG. 141, the lower back movable decorative body, the upper upper movable decorative body, the upper left movable decorative body on the back, the lower left movable decorative body on the back, the upper right movable decorative body on the back, and the lower right movable decorative body on the back are moved to the first united position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 1st picture is light-emitting decoration on the light guide plate of a front effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 2nd picture is light-emitting decoration on the light guide plate of a front effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 2nd picture of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from FIG. 143 and FIG. 144 is light-emitting and decorated. In addition to illuminating the first pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit, the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back right lower It is a front view of the game board which shows the movable decorative body moved to the 2nd united position. In addition to illuminating the first pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit, the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back right lower It is a front view of the game board which shows the movable decorative body moved to the first united position. The second pattern is luminescently decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from that of FIG. 147, and the back lower movable decoration body, the back upper movable decoration body, the back upper left movable decoration body, the back left lower movable decoration body, and the back upper right It is a front view of the game board which shows the movable decorative body and the movable decorative body at the lower right of the back in a state which moved to the first united position. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position. be. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 and the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 are attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the upper hinge assembly 50 and the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame make up the upper hinge member 510 of the main body 4 and the main body. This is for supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 coaxially and rotatably, and mounting the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side in the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer circumference of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 that receives the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. Covers the payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. , A back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B ( For example, it is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 for granting a predetermined number of game balls B). The obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.

Further, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, or displays the front effect unit 2600 and the backside effect according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. The player can be entertained by performing a movable effect or a light emitting effect by the unit 3100, the back-up effect unit 3200, the back-left effect unit 3300, the back-right effect unit 3400, and the like.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 and the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 11a on the right side surface that is opposite to the recess 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a on the left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the rear side to the left. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a to be mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hooking piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating up and down at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the lower member 41 of the outer frame and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates the front and rear and extends to the left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620 of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a to connect the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the lower hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, stands out, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will come into contact with the forward protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be rotated by a hinge. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Lower hinge member of outer frame]
The lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the battery can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game of driving into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and the like. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the front and rear and is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c, which is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c, which penetrates the insertion recess 101c back and forth, of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. With a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. The outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the plate unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the door frame is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the decorative substrate 413 of the window decoration, the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, it is behind the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 112 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and hooks 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions that are formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions that face each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame top hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the upper left corner of the front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. In the state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hing member under the door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular cylinder lock 130 that is attached to the rear side of a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces from the rear end to the front at positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is equipped with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 In addition, the portion of the taxiing guideway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 by partitioning between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. The rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported, the rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and the rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operation paddle 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by moving the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation paddle 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 is centered on the right end. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation paddle 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating paddle 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating paddle 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotates to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 149) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is rotatably supported by a shaft or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation paddle 143c slides downward as the operation transmission unit moves downward. Will move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball pulling member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is a partition portion. It is possible to prevent the bounce at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35B and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It is provided with a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 when a fraudulent act such as operating the string to move the illegal game ball B in and out of the first starting port or the like is performed. A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then a V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the ball, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and communicates with the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit, and the through ball passage 150a. The through-ball passage 150a is provided with a full-tan ball receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the front view and can communicate with the full-tan guide path of the lower full-tan ball path unit of the main body frame 4. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opened upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and did not reach the game area 5a even though it was launched by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball socket 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank receiver 150b and the foul ball socket 150c. It is provided with a ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the dish unit.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the operating protrusion 613a of the 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the region 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of the flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and the flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. It is provided with a handle cover 185 attached to a cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 returns to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the one end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are formed in the three groove portions 181c, respectively. When inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f to be formed.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape of the first protrusion 182a and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the third protrusion 182a has a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with both side surfaces inclined substantially linearly.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 is bulged forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 182 or the like, the static electricity acting by the player is detected and the handle 182 or the like of the player is subjected to the static electricity. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before operating the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. A lower plate 202 capable of storing B and a lower plate 202 are provided.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For an annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged on the right side, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 on the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. A unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (a shallow rear is open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is upper on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth below the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view with the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted. The handle insertion port 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted through the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance / exit 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the dish ball is pulled out, the dish is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball pulling guide path 241c, and the notch 211d of the unit 240.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating vertically near the left end and a through port 213b penetrating vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through port 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the dish lower right decorative board 288. , And to relay the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of the lent game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card that was put into the machine.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is returned after deducting the loaned game ball B. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a tubular front base 231 extending vertically and a front base 231 that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231. It includes a slider 232 and. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removal button 222, and the lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 after the upper plate ball removal. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the rear base 241 in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 attached so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

The rear base 241 projects upward from the portion where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward so that the game ball B can pass through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a. A game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a taxiing guide path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance / exit 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the taxiing guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view from the portion in which the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It is open on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the taxiing guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and has an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. It is provided with an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball pulling button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the working paddle 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is passed through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the actuating receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 and the upper plate ball extraction unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from each other on the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed on the front surfaces of each. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut out upward from the lower front end of a portion covering the outer circumference of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched at a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. A production operation unit formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically in the right front corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It includes a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with slits extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball pulling button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. NS. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removing lid 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removing hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removing lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish upper left reflector 272 that is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is provided with a dish upper left decorative substrate 273 which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be light-emittingly decorated.

When the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, a dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative substrate 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper right side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

A part of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 is projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 in a state of being assembled on the door frame 3. It is possible to form a step in which the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate are raised from the upper side bulging portion 252a. As a result, the player can hook his / her finger on the step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when operating the effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. Further, the step between the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the plate upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Lower left decoration unit of the plate and lower right decoration unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, respectively. Be done. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate cooperate with the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate and the upper right decorative unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right to have translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is provided with a dish lower left decorative substrate 283, which is attached to the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate, and the right end is the lower left decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has translucency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate. It includes a reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative substrate 288 that is attached to the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 286 on the lower right of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate seems to have the right end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decorative body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate emits light. The entire front surface of the plate can be luminescent and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the outer circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. It includes a transmission gear 350 for an operation ring that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315, and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the light are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in a semicircular shape at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled into the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a semicircular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a dish center upper decorative body 312a and a dish center upper decorative body 312a below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs of the dish center lower decoration substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be luminescently decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semi-arc shape, the dish When the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center and the LED of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be light-emitting and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the upper left decorative body 312a of the plate is continuous with the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the lower upper decorative body 312b of the plate is the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the right of the plate. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper portion is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350 that penetrates the flange portion 322 and opens upward on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 are provided.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 from below, and the portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer circumference of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially matching the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operating ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically and vertically on the ring mounting base 331 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the 332, and that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward of the rotating base 332. It is provided with a regulating ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which forms a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is provided with a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates up and down at a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotating base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs forming the outer and upper parts of the ring extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of ring outer upper covers 335 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The decorative portion 335b is provided, and the outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer lower cover 336 of the ring has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower parts in a circle extends in an annular shape, and the outer lower surface portion 336a projecting upward and toward the center from the inside in the circumferential direction. A plurality of outer and lower cover mounting portions 336b, which are arranged in a plurality of units, are provided. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming an inner and upper portion in a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a tubular surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. A gear cover that rotatably attaches the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It is equipped with 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged so as to be spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the interval of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them first detects the detection piece 345b. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the speed change gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type production.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 rotates integrally with the bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 and the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through port 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring forming the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer and lower covers 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be light-emitting decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a more diverse effect to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a push operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference, and is arranged on a target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is movably attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urging the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362. The center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373 are substantially the same. The central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed tubular shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It is provided with a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button main body 373 and the central button cover 375 form a central pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer circumference of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and moves up and down so as to cover the outer circumference and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 includes an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380, and constitutes an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the push detection sensor 381 for detecting the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is provided with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating and lowering of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 penetrates vertically in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the central hole 364b near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that projects upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 is a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. It includes a pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central port 373d) of the center button body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaquely formed. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can make the central button cover 375 emit light by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and extends upward from the inner circumference of the annular board portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and the central button main body 373. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62A, the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is set. It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position where the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height that substantially coincides with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in a plan view, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. One cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the elevating base 364 is restricted from moving further upward. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force equal to the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved to the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The press detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the press detection piece 373e is not detected by the press detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. It rolls along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decorative board 314, a dish center lower decorative board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, pressure detection sensor 381, elevating detection sensor 382, and relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 65C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the columnar central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302 and the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are separated in the circumferential direction, is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 to make the rotation operation heavier or give a click feeling.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lower position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like the steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to illuminate and decorate only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressure is detected. No pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 becomes an obstacle and the rotation operation becomes difficult. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative board 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper end of the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of the door.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, so that it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded in the door frame left side unit 400.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414, which is inserted into each of the side window interior decoration portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415, which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically, and the door frame right side base 411, and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flattened in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It is provided with an inner panel on the right side of the door frame and 417, which extend in a shape and penetrate in the left-right direction to form a through-hole 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It includes a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decorative member 412 is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The side window interior decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed so that the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, the through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The decorative body 419 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be light-emittingly decorated. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (edge of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as those next to each other to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is the top bottom cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top bottom plate 454, which is connected to the lower end of the door frame, is attached.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459, which is arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. Cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. The door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and the door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending to the left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It includes a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends move downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent form so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top central speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer side of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative board 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Through holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs, respectively.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the upper upper decorative body 312a of the plate, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, and the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of these decorative substrates. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer circumference of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large diameter upper decorative bodies 312a and lower center of the dish 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. Door frame left side unit 400 door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 410 door frame right side decorative body having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the lower center decoration body 312b The 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer circumference are arranged. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the player's head (face) seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be used to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which are attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and is attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer circumference of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a whose front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It includes a mounting portion 501c and a game board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the unit 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that can be rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a to attach the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connecting cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connecting cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hing member on the body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes a main body frame upper hinge pin 512 that is pivotally supported. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can rotate, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 is arranged at an upward interval from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged and lower. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward from the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated in cooperation with the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove portion 530a is inserted with the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing flare 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is attached to the flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the launch base 541, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the upper portion 551d of the back plate extending downward from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front side of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a ball tank 552 that is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and is open upward in a box shape that extends to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one minute from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B, which is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes the box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 92).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so that the movable piece member 573 can move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the second transmission gear 587 are meshed with each other. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. 90).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as a payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, and the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in the front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b in the front view, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number is set based on the detection of the ball out by the ball out of ball detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being arranged in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper normal payout passage 600c is communicated with the upper ball storage passage 600b on the upstream side. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball pulling passage 610c to the ball pulling guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharging ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharging port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and is composed of a plurality of slits extending vertically and vertically, and a circular speaker mounting portion 621a and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it steps backward in a stepped manner. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, a large sound with deep bass can be output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. A through-cylinder 623a that communicates with the through-hole 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball ejection port 629 that ejects the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 97) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and the deterrence against fraudulent activity is enhanced.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 mounted on the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the state where the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 99A. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on a ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) as viewed from the front in an exploded manner. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 553, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It has.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose shape extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in the front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. In the ball tank 552, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment such as the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is stored.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end side of the left side wall 552d to the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b. It is formed over the length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be circulated in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game sphere B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left side of the front view. Further, in a plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side, and then moves to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions are aligned in the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball shavings) can be less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball squeeze) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a movable defect occurs in the movable production unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, the belt, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. Can produce the effects of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left (left) and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so as to be the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is inclined so as to be low in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball and is on the bottom surface. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the discharge portion 551j. It covers the upper side of an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. It includes a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501 m, a gap is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 at a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. On both outer sides of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o in the left-right direction, the upper ends are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o and extend in a strip-like shape in the front-rear direction, and the outside of the game ball B in the left-right direction. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than a length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the game ball B and the game ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. Regarding the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided rearward by the detour passage 552 g changes so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end from the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552 g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide part of the tank rail.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552 g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion in the front view of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that goes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the detour passage 552 g The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in the front view from a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending laterally outwardly and vertically on the same surface as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552 g, respectively. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to step backward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 553 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to the supply from the island equipment, first of all, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest of the upper edge of the outer circumference, is exceeded. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and can be discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by inclining the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other (increase in the ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shaving) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m beyond the overflow portion 552 f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the detour passage 552 g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the ball from returning from the detour passage 552 g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552 g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and biting each other due to the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B may be clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since the game balls are changed so as to coincide with each other, as the plurality of game balls B move toward the downstream side in the bulge portion 553b, they can be aligned so as to be aligned with respect to the width direction. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 104) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, causing a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) of the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) on which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 107 to 114. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which the game panel is opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel is transparent. FIG. 113 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the game panel is made opaque to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nails. FIG. 114 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the attacker unit on the game board.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that grant a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. This is for performing a game that enjoys the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 113) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 97, 149, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 118 and the like), which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and in the front unit 2000 and the back unit in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. It includes a production drive board 1720 for driving a decorative board and a drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 for accommodating a panel relay board 1710 and a production drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 on the left side in the rear view, and is detachably attached to the rear surface in the effect display device 1600 on the right side in the rear view.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B.

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a front start unit 2100 and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200. It is attached to the side slope 2300 and the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. The attacker unit 2400, which is mounted above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a frame shape having a gate portion 2003. It includes a center accessory 2500 and a front effect unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the frame of the center accessory 2500.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the attacker unit 2400, and a second that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. It includes a start opening sensor 2402 and a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005. Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a game received in the first starting port 2002. It includes a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the sphere B and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting the magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start port 2002 (see FIG. 149).

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back lower effect unit 3100 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and a back upper effect unit 3200 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. And the back left effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the back right effect unit 3400 attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. ..

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119. FIG. 115 is a front view of the front component and the game panel in the game board, FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the front component and the game panel disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the front component and the game panel disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The front component 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-inducing portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch of the panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the panel plate 1110 and the like of the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. That is, through the front component 1000, the portion overlapping the decorative pattern 1150, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 121).

Further, the front component 1000 is provided with a columnar boss portion 1020 projecting forward at four corners on the front surface. These four boss portions 1020 are intended to prevent load misalignment by positioning the front constituent members 1000 in a stacked state when transporting only the plurality of front constituent members 1000.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 115 to 122 and the like. FIG. 120 (a) is a front view of the game panel shown with the board cover removed, and FIG. 120 (b) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the lower panel decorative board in (a). FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative pattern of the game panel and the front constituent members and the front unit. FIG. 122 is a front view of the game board showing the relationship between the decorative pattern on the game panel and the obstacle nail.

The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

Further, the game panel 1100 includes a panel decorative substrate 1130 on which a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are mounted, and a substrate on which the panel decorative substrate 1130 is attached to the panel holder 1120. It is equipped with a cover 1135. The panel decorative substrate 1130 is composed of an upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and a lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view. The board cover 1135 is composed of an upper left board cover 1136 for attaching the upper left panel decorative board 1131 to the panel holder 1120 and a lower left board cover 1137 for attaching the lower left panel decorative board 1132 to the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and rear, and the upper edge and the lower edge are separated from each other in the left-right direction, so that the plate thickness is thin. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions 1114 and the like. The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion 1114 is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw 1125 or the engaging piece 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

As shown in FIG. 120A and the like, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500, which is offset to the upper right of the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The width is wide so that the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side and the right side are narrow widths where a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel plate 1110 is provided with a decorative pattern 1150 formed by a plurality of linear grooves on the rear surface. The decorative pattern 1150 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of horizontal lines extending horizontally at regular intervals, a plurality of upper right diagonal lines rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise at the same intervals as the plurality of horizontal lines, and a horizontal line and an upper right diagonal line. It is a geometric pattern composed of a plurality of upper left diagonal lines rotated 60 degrees clockwise at the same intervals as a plurality of horizontal lines passing through the intersection with. In other words, the decorative pattern 1150 is a geometric pattern in which a plurality of equilateral triangle contours formed by a horizontal line, an upper right diagonal line, and an upper left diagonal line are arranged in a constant pattern. This decorative pattern 1150 has two equilateral triangle contour portions on the left and right sides of the first starting port 2002 and three equilateral triangle contour portions near the upper end of the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Inside each of the above, a pattern consisting of the outlines of two equilateral triangles of different sizes is further provided.

The decorative pattern 1150 has a V-shaped cross section. The decoration pattern 1150 can be visually recognized from the player side in front of the panel decoration substrate 1130 even when the panel decoration LED 1130a is not emitted, and decorates the inside of the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is decorated with a geometric pattern composed of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles when the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 is made to emit light and the light is incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110. The pattern 1150 can be luminescently decorated.

The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 has a radiation portion 1151 that mainly reflects the light radiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside and the light radiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside. It is composed of a radiation light guide unit 1152 that reflects and guides light along a line. The radiating light guide unit 1152 satisfies at least one of a deeper groove depth and a longer peripheral length in cross section as compared with the radiating unit 1151. The radiation light guide unit 1152 is formed so as to connect (or intersect) a plurality of radiation units 1151, and diffusely reflects the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside in the panel plate 1110. , Can guide light in the direction of the groove extension. That is, the radiating light guide unit 1152 plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiating units 1151 connected by itself to the other, whereby the arrangement portion and the number of arrangements of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be increased. Within the limited range, the photosensitivity (ratio of the amount of light radiated (reflected) forward) of the entire decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is increased. More specifically, as shown by the two-point chain line in FIG. 120 (a), the radiation light guide unit 1152 is usually from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132. Light is guided to the radiating portion 1151 arranged outside the range of the light guide region 1103, the radiating portion 1151 is made to emit light, and the photosensitivity of the entire decorative pattern 1150 is increased.

As a result, the radiation light guide portion 1152 has more radiation than the radiation portion 1151 of the decoration pattern 1150 formed in the portion where the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is difficult to reach (the portion outside the normal light guide region 1103). Light can be transmitted to decorate the radiating portion 1151 with a sufficient amount of light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is made to emit light, the light incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiation unit 1151 and the radiation light guide unit 1152, and from the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles. The decorative pattern 1150 formed in the pattern of the geometric pattern can be radiated and decorated with uniform brightness over substantially the entire area.

In the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. The plurality of obstacle nails N have a specific obstacle nail N1 that has an important role in the game. As shown in FIG. 122, the specific obstacle nail N1 is arranged near the warp entrance 2501, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the gate portion 2003. If the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted or bent due to contact with the game ball B, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the warp entrance 2501 or the general winning opening 2001 changes, so that the game hall side It is a target for constant maintenance so that there is no distortion or the like.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122, a decoration prohibited area 1104 is set within a predetermined range (for example, a radius of 1.5 mm to 3 mm) centered on the specific obstacle nail N1, and the decoration pattern 1150 is within the range. The radiation unit 1151 and the radiation light guide unit 1152 are not formed. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the specific obstacle nail N1 can be easily seen, and it can be easily confirmed whether or not the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted. Further, since the groove of the radiation unit 1151 and the radiation light guide unit 1152 is not formed in the decoration prohibited area 1140 around the specific obstacle nail N1, it is specified in order to adjust the specific obstacle nail N1 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the obstacle nail N1 is hit, the force is transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the radiation unit 1151 and the radiation light guide unit 1152, and it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1110 from cracking or cracking.

Further, among the obstacle nails N excluding the specific obstacle nail N1, the obstacle nail N planted at the portion overlapping the decorative pattern 1150 is not shown, but the tip planted on the panel plate 1110. However, it protrudes inside the groove constituting the decorative pattern 1150. Therefore, when the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 is made to emit light and the light is incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110, the light is irradiated from the groove of the decorative pattern 1150 to the tip of the obstacle nail N protruding inside the groove. Then, the light is reflected by the inclined tip of the obstacle nail N, and the tip of the obstacle nail N can be made to shine. As a result, the obstacle nail N can be made to shine, and the player can be shown a light emitting effect that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. In addition, in the game area 5a, the decorative pattern 1150 may be intentionally overlapped with the obstacle nail N planted in the special portion, thereby, together with the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150. The obstacle nail N in a special part can be made to shine, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the obstacle nail N in a special part, and the game ball B aimed at the special obstacle nail N can be driven. The operation can be performed.

In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 1150 composed of linear grooves is formed by cutting the panel plate 1110. Further, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed before the formation of the planting hole for planting the obstacle nail N. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cutting debris discharged by forming the decorative pattern 1150 from clogging the planting hole, and the obstacle nail N can be planted in a good state.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1123 which is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion 1123 having substantially the same size as the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a penetrating through port 1121.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion 1123 and the plurality of protruding pins 1124 projecting forward from the holding step portion 1123 and each of which is inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws 1125 that elastically engage with the engaging step portion 1114 of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion 1123. It comprises a pair of engaging pieces 1126 that engage with the two engaging steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110, respectively. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step portion 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece 1126 from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 to the rear to move the upper part and the lower left side. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion 1114 of the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion 1123. At this time, the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 has two board mounting recesses 1127 recessed from the front to the rear in the upper left and upper right corners of the front view outside the holding step 1123, and rearward behind each of the board mounting recesses 1127. It is provided with two connect recesses 1128, which are recessed from the front to the front. The upper left board cover 1136 to which the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is attached and the lower left board cover 1137 to which the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is attached are attached to the two board mounting recesses 1127, respectively, from the front. The upper board mounting recess 1127 is located behind the function display unit 1400. Further, the lower substrate mounting recess 1127 is located behind the certificate stamp affixing portion 1012 in the front component 1000. In the lower substrate mounting recess 1127, the engaging claw 1125 that engages with the engaging step portion 1114 at the lower left diagonal portion of the panel plate 1110 protrudes from the boundary side with the holding step portion 1123.

In the connect recess 1128 of the panel holder 1120, the connector 1131a of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 attached to the board mounting recess 1127 and the connector 1132a of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 penetrate the rear wall of the board mounting recess 1127. The size is such that a sufficiently large space is formed around the connector 1131b and the connector 1132b so that a finger can be inserted in the state of protruding inward. As a result, the connection and disconnection work of the connection cable (not shown) to the connection connector 1131b and the connection connector 1132b can be easily performed.

The panel decorative substrate 1130 is composed of an upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decorative substrate 1132. A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a are mounted on the front surface of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131. The plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 are arranged along the diagonal portion of the upper left on the peripheral edge of the panel plate 1110, with the uppermost side facing right and the lowermost side facing downward. It is mounted so as to irradiate light, and the rest is mounted so as to irradiate light toward the lower right so as to be perpendicular to the diagonal portion on the upper left of the panel plate 1110. A connector 1131a projecting rearward is attached to the rear surface of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131.

A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are mounted on the front surface of the lower left panel decoration board 1132. As shown in FIG. 120 (b), the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is notched so as to avoid the lower locking claw 1125 in the panel holder 1120, and a plurality of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is formed while avoiding the notched portion. The panel decorative LED 1130a of the above is mounted so as to irradiate light upward, to the right, and to the upper right. A connector 1132a projecting rearward is attached to the rear surface of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132.

The panel decorative substrate 1130 is formed of a white member so as to be inconspicuous from the front. Further, the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are side view type wide-angle full-color LEDs, and can also irradiate light forward.

The panel decorative substrate 1130 is arranged so that the front surface (plate surface) on which the side view type panel decorative LED 1130a is mounted is parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110. As a result, the dimensions of the panel decorative substrate 1130 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner than the panel plate 1110, the panel decorative substrate 1130 can be attached to the panel holder 1120 without any problem, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be attached. The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be light-emitting decorated while suppressing the increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel decorative substrate 1130 has a plate surface parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110, and is large enough to be larger than the size of the panel decorative LED 1130a mounted on the plate surface (front surface). It is the board surface of. In other words, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is the other area (surplus) in which the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, which are 40 to 100 times as large as the LED mounting area occupied by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to be mounted, are not mounted. Area). As a result, the mounting strength of the panel decorative board 1130 can be increased, and even if vibrations or shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 act, the panel decorative board 1130 and the panel board 1110 It is possible to prevent the displacement of the positional relationship of the above, and it is possible to suppress the deviation of the optical axis of the panel decorative LED 1130a and prevent a problem in the incident of light on the panel plate 1110.

Further, since the panel decorative board 1130 is mounted on the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, vibrations and shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are performed. However, it is difficult to transmit to the panel decorative substrate 1130. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the vibration and the like acting on the panel decorative substrate 1130 (panel decorative LED 1130a), suppress the decrease in the durability of the panel decorative LED 1130a, and similarly to the above, the panel decorative substrate 1130. It is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 from being displaced, and it is possible to suppress the deviation of the optical axis of the panel decorative LED 1130a and prevent a problem in light incident on the panel plate 1110. ..

A panel decorative board 1130 is attached to the rear side of the board cover 1135. The substrate cover 1135 is formed to be frosted glass-like translucent so that the panel decorative substrate 1130 attached to the rear side is difficult to recognize, and is formed so as to diffuse the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a. There is. As a result, it is possible to reduce the fact that the light (leaked) radiated forward from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 illuminates the player and causes the player to feel dazzling. It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

In the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, a decorative pattern 1150 composed of a plurality of equilateral triangle contours is formed on a transparent panel plate 1110, which is transparent and has a three-dimensional effect as compared with the conventional decoration by a printing sheet. The decoration can be shown to the player. Then, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is made to emit light, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be made to emit light, and the game ball B in the game area 5a which has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machines is generated. It is possible to show the player the luminous decoration of the distribution area.

Further, since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed only in the decorative pattern forming region 1101 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a circulates in various flow paths, the decorative pattern 1150 is applied to the entire game area 5a. Compared with the case where the decorative pattern is formed, the cost related to the formation of the decorative pattern 1150 can be reduced.

Further, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, since the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is arranged behind the function display unit 1400, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is made to emit light, the function display unit 1400 is displayed. It is possible to illuminate from the rear, and it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the function display unit 1400 (function display unit), which has not been found in conventional pachinko machines, is light-emitting and decorated.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, since the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is arranged behind the certificate stamp sticking portion 1012, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is made to emit light, the certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 is subjected to light emission. The attached certificate stamp (not shown) can be illuminated from behind to emit light, and the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the certificate stamp is lit up and decorated, which is not possible with conventional pachinko machines.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, a condenser lens, a diffusion lens, or the like is not arranged between the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the side surface of the panel plate 1110. As a result, the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a is directly irradiated to a wide range on the side surface of the panel plate 1110, and the light can be incident on a wide range inside the panel plate 1110, so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be formed. It can be beautifully luminescent and decorated.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the panel holder 1120 is provided with the panel decoration substrate 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) for luminescent decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. When changing to a panel board 1110 with other different decorative patterns in order to change the model of the game board 5 or make a minor change to the model, it can be handled only by replacing the panel board 1110. The holder 1120, the front component 1000, the panel decorative substrate 1130, and the substrate cover 1135 can be used as common parts. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 provided with the other decorative pattern 1150, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the panel decorative board 1130 is mounted in the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, and the panel decorative board 1130 and the panel board 1110 are separately mounted. I am trying to install it. As a result, the panel holder 1120 from which the board cover 1135 and the panel decorative board 1130 have been removed can be used for a pachinko machine (game board) having a normal panel board 1110 to which the decorative pattern 1150 is not applied. The 1120 and the front component 1000 can be common parts. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 provided with the other decorative pattern 1150, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to. When used in a model having a panel plate 1110 not provided with the decorative pattern 1150, a dummy board cover 1135 may be attached to the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120, or the panel holder 1120 may be used. You may use it with the board cover 1135 and the panel decorative board 1130 attached.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of the decoration pattern in the game panel]
Subsequently, in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, the panel plate 1110 on which the decorative pattern 1160 different from the decorative pattern 1150 is formed will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 (a) is a front view of a panel board in which a decorative pattern different from that of FIG. 120 is formed, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view showing the panel board of (a) together with a front unit.

Similar to the above-mentioned decorative pattern 1150, the decorative pattern 1160 shown in FIG. 123 has a V-shaped cross section formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110. The decoration pattern 1160 can be visually recognized from the player side in front of the panel decoration substrate 1130 even when the panel decoration LED 1130a is not emitted, and decorates the inside of the game area 5a. The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be decorated by emitting light by causing the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 to emit light and causing light to enter the inside of the panel plate 1110.

As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern 1160 has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate portion 2003, a side slope 2300, and a warp entrance 2501 of a center accessory 2500 on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. A radiation portion 1161 that reflects light incident on the inside from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 to the front is formed in a rear portion such as the above. As a result, when the decoration pattern 1160 (radiating portion 1161) is light-emittingly decorated, the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the side slope 2300, the warp entrance 2501 of the center accessory 2500, etc. Can be luminescently decorated from behind, making them stand out.

Although not shown, the decorative pattern 1160 may be formed with a plurality of radiating light guide portions that guide the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 to the radiating portion 1161. Further, the decorative pattern 1160 may be combined with the decorative pattern 1150.

[5-2b. Adjustment of obstacle nails in the game panel]
Subsequently, the adjustment of the plurality of obstacle nails N in which the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is planted will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 126 and the like. FIG. 124 is a front view showing a nail adjusting film for adjusting an obstacle nail planted in a game panel. FIG. 125 is a front view of the main body frame shown in a state where the game board is attached. FIG. 126 (a) is an enlarged explanatory view showing a state before the nail adjustment film is attached to the game board, and FIG. 126 (b) is an enlarged explanatory view showing a state in which the nail adjustment film is attached to the game board. be.

In the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 113 and the like, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the game area 5a in a predetermined gauge arrangement. More specifically, the plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, which is between the inner circumference of the frame of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and the outer circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. It is installed.

By the way, when the game is performed, the game balls B driven into the game area 5a frequently come into contact with the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the game area 5a, so that the operating time is long. Indeed, the distortion of the obstacle nail N becomes large. Then, when the distortion of the obstacle nail N becomes large, the flow path of the game ball B changes from the state at the time of manufacture, and the winning openings (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large) It becomes difficult for the game ball B to be accepted in the winning opening 2005, etc., or it becomes difficult for the game ball B to pass through the gate portion 2003, so that the player cannot enjoy the game and the interest in the game is lowered. There was a problem. Alternatively, as the distortion of the obstacle nail N becomes large, contrary to the above, the game ball B is easily accepted into the winning opening, and the payout of the game ball B increases, so that a pachinko machine is installed. There was a problem that the burden on the pachinko hall side was increased. Further, when the distortion of the obstacle nail N becomes large, some players recognize that the game ball B is difficult to enter the winning opening just by looking at the board surface of the game board 5, and as a pachinko machine to play. , There was a problem that the operating rate of the pachinko machine was lowered because the game with the pachinko machine was avoided.

In response to the above problems, on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, a hammer that hits the obstacle nail N and a nail that has a gauge ball with the same diameter as the game ball B attached to the tip of an elongated rod. An adjustment gauge and an adjustment gauge are used to periodically adjust the strain of the obstacle nail N. However, in the adjustment using the nail adjusting gauge, the distorted obstacle nail N is adjusted by intuition and experience, so that the adjustment of the obstacle nail N tends to vary. In addition, the adjustment of the obstacle nail N may be performed not only by a skilled technician called a nail technician but also by an inexperienced technician. There was a problem that it took.

In response to such a problem, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a nail adjusting film 1170 as shown in FIG. 124 is prepared. The nail adjusting film 1170 has a transparent resin film having a front pattern 1171 which is the same as the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000) and a nail pattern 1172 which is the same as the obstacle nail N. , Is printed. The nail pattern 1172 is drawn on a circle having substantially the same diameter as the head of the obstacle nail N. Further, the nail adjusting film 1170 has an identification unit 1173 that indicates a specific obstacle nail N1 that plays an important role in the game among the plurality of obstacle nails N. The identification unit 1173 is a circular pattern having a diameter one size larger than that of the nail pattern 1172. As a result, the specific obstacle nail N1 is drawn in a double circle with the nail pattern 1172 and the pattern of the identification unit 1173, and can be identified at a glance. Further, the identification unit 1173 is drawn with circles of different line types according to the importance of the specific obstacle nail N1. Here, the importance of the specific obstacle nail N1 is divided into "most important" and "important", and "most important" is drawn with a dotted line (broken line) and "important" is drawn with a dotted chain line. (See enlarged view of FIG. 124).

The resin films constituting the nail adjustment film 1170 include polyethylene terephthalate film, polyethylene naphthalate film, polypropylene film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film, polyimide film, polyphenylene sulfide film, nylon film, aramid film, polyethylene film, and celluloid. Film, etc. can be mentioned. In the present embodiment, as the resin film constituting the nail adjusting film 1170, a material that easily generates (charges) static electricity is used.

The nail adjusting film 1170 has a positioning portion 1174 for positioning with respect to the game board 5. The positioning portion 1174 of the present embodiment is a hole into which four boss portions 1020 (see FIG. 125) protruding forward from the front surface of the front component 1000 are inserted.

The positioning portion 1174 is not limited to the hole into which the boss portion 1020 of the front constituent member 1000 is inserted, and the front constituent member 1000 and the game board 5 project forward in the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached from the front. It may be a hole into which the game board lock member 505, the payout passage opening / closing door 613, the door frame hook 652, the outer frame unlocking lever 656, and the like are inserted. Alternatively, the positioning portion 1174 may be used as the upper part (upper side) of the nail adjustment film 1170 and inserted into the gap between the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 and the upper end of the game board 5 for positioning. good. Further, when the positioning portion 1174 is set to the left side of the nail adjusting film 1170 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted. By doing so, the pachinko machine 1 is inserted into the groove 530a (see FIG. 125) of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 to prevent unauthorized tools from being inserted into the inside from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1 for positioning. You may try to do it.

Next, a method of adjusting the obstacle nail N using the nail adjusting film 1170 will be described. It is assumed that the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, and the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4. In this state, the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 is covered with the nail adjustment film 1170 from the front, and the boss portion 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted through the positioning section 1174 to the game board 5. Position the nail adjustment film 1170. In the present embodiment, since the nail adjusting film 1170 is made of a material that is easily charged, the nail adjusting film 1170 is attached to the front surface of the front component 1000 by static electricity when the game board 5 is charged. Therefore, the nail adjusting film 1170 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the game board 5 by this static electricity.

When the nail adjustment film 1170 is positioned on the front surface of the game board 5 and viewed from the front, the front pattern 1171 of the nail adjustment film 1170 matches the shapes of the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000. You can check the deviation. In this state, the head of the obstruction nail N can be seen through the transparent nail adjustment film 1170. When the obstacle nail N is distorted, the circle of the nail pattern 1172 and the circle of the head of the obstacle nail N are not concentric, and the centers of the circles do not coincide with each other ( See FIG. 126 (b)). Thereby, the obstacle nail N to be adjusted can be easily determined.

Then, when adjusting the distorted obstacle nail N, the nail adjustment film 1170 is rolled up, the corresponding obstacle nail N is hit with a hammer, and then the nail adjustment film 1170 is covered with the circle of the nail pattern 1172 and the obstacle. The deviation of the head of the nail N from the circle is confirmed, and this is repeated so that the circle of the head of the obstacle nail N is concentric with the circle of the nail pattern 1172. Further, when adjusting the obstacle nail N, since the identification portion 1173 indicating the specific obstacle nail N1 is drawn on the nail adjustment film 1170, the specific obstacle nail N1 is carefully adjusted.

As described above, according to the nail adjustment film 1170 of the present embodiment, the same front pattern 1171 as the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000 is drawn, so that the front pattern 1171 matches the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000. By doing so, the nail adjusting film 1170 can be easily positioned with respect to the game board 5. Further, since the identification portion 1173 showing the specific obstacle nail N1 that plays an important role in the game is drawn on the nail adjustment film 1170, the position of the specific obstacle nail N1 that requires careful adjustment can be easily determined. It can be determined. Further, since the nail adjusting film 1170 includes a positioning portion 1174 into which the boss portion 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted, the nail adjusting film 1170 can be easily positioned with respect to the game board 5. Therefore, by adjusting the obstacle nail N according to the nail adjustment film 1170, it is possible to reduce the variation in the adjustment of the obstacle nail N, and even an inexperienced technician can easily adjust the obstacle nail N. , The work time required for adjusting the obstacle nail N can be shortened.

In the above-mentioned nail adjustment film 1170, the identification portion 1173 is shown to have a circle pattern having a diameter larger than the circle of the nail pattern 1172, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific obstacle nail N1 is indicated by an arrow. It may be shown or color coded.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed in the above to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 149) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2506, a second starting port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a general winning opening sensor 2401, and a general winning opening sensor 3001. , The first start port sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and two normal lottery results for which the shin is drawn by passing the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It includes a normal symbol display made of LEDs and a normal hold display made of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. It is equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 111 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 149) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the upper surface and a lower fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner peripheral surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107, 108, 110, 111, 113 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates through and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B.

A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. ing. The general winning opening 2001 on the left side is arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side is arranged near the right end in the game area 5a and lower than the center in the vertical direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the upper right corner of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is located below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side and higher than the first starting port 2002. The grand prize opening 2005 is arranged on the left side of the second starting port 2004 at a height between the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004.

The table unit 2000 is mounted in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side slope that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200. It is attached to the right side of the front view of the 2300 and the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. A frame-shaped center accessory that is mounted above the attacker unit 2400, the start port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a gate portion 2003. It includes 2500 and a front effect unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the frame of the center accessory 2500.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002, which is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted. The start port unit 2100 is formed to be transparent as a whole, and the rear side (decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 121).

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first starting port 2002 is the center described later. It is located directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The start port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver it to the guide path in the back unit 3000. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 149).

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be received at all times. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

In the side unit 2200, the rightmost general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at the same height as the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 on the intermediate side in the left-right direction is on the right side. The general winning opening 2001 on the leftmost side opens upward at a position higher than the general winning opening 2001, and the leftmost general winning opening 2001 opens toward the upper left of the front view at a position higher than the general winning opening 2001 on the intermediate side. There is.

The side unit 2200 is formed to be transparent as a whole, and the rear side (decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 121). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 are in a state of protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver it to the guide path of the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 149).

[5-8c. Side slope]
The side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so that the right end is lowered when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the shelf portion 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

The side slope 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right. The side slope 2300 is formed to be transparent as a whole, and the rear side (decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 121).

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 is formed to be substantially entirely transparent, and the rear side (decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 121). The attacker unit 2400 includes one of the four general winning openings 2001, the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 113 and the like).

The attacker unit 2400 is formed in an L-shape in which the outer shape in front view extends upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction to the upper end on the right side. The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward in the upper right corner, and is capable of opening upward at a position to the left of the general winning opening 2001. (2) Starting port 2004 is arranged. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward is arranged at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004.

In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is opened with a size slightly larger than that of the game ball B. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and opens upward, and the large winning opening 2005 is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It is 5 times wider and opens upward.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 149).

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second start opening door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening door 2411 according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003. The starting port solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to a special lottery result or a second special lottery result.

As shown in FIG. 114, the attacker unit 2400 has an upper right left passage 2421 and an upper right right passage 2422 and an upper right right passage 2422 on which the game balls B can flow downward on both the left and right sides of the general winning opening 2001 arranged in the upper right. The upper right left guide shelf 2423 and the lower right left guide shelf 2423, which are inclined to the left so as to merge with the upper right left passage 2421 from the downstream end of the general winning opening 2001. The upper guide shelf 2424 of the second starting port extending to the left so as to be lowered from directly below the upper right left passage 2421 toward the second starting port 2004, and the left end side of the second starting port 2004 to be lowered. From the part of the second starting port lower guide shelf 2425 extending to the left and the portion below the second starting port lower guidance shelf 2425 that is spaced from the left end to the left of the second starting port lower guidance shelf 2425. The large winning opening upper guide shelf 2426 extending to the left so as to be lower toward the large winning opening 2005, and the lower side of the large winning opening extending to the left so as to be lower from the left end to the left end side of the large winning opening 2005. It is equipped with a guide shelf 2427.

Further, the attacker unit 2400 opens to the left on the right end side of the second starting port upper guide shelf 2424, and guides the game ball B below the second starting port 2004 and the large winning opening 2005. A central left passage that opens upward between the passage 2428, the lower guide shelf 2425 of the second starting port, and the upper guide shelf 2426 of the large winning opening, and guides the game ball B below the large winning opening 2005. 2429 and.

The second starting port door 2411 is formed in a plate shape extending to the left and right so that the left end is lowered as well as extending to the front and rear, and the second starting port 2004 is opened upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. Can be opened and closed. The second starting port door 2411 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction near the upper end of the second starting port 2004. The second start port door 2411 closes the second start port 2004 by advancing, and guides the game ball B that has been distributed through the upper guide shelf 2424 of the second start port to the left, and then guides the second start port to the left. It can be delivered onto the lower guide shelf 2425. The second start port door 2411 is driven by the start port solenoid 2412 to move backward to open the second start port 2004 and accept the game ball B that has flowed down to the second start port 2004. can. The second start port door 2411 closes the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid is ON (when energized). Let me.

The grand prize opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape that extends back and forth and extends to the left and right so that the left end is lowered, and opens and closes the grand prize opening 2005 that opens upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. It is possible. The large winning opening door 2413 closes the large winning opening 2005 by moving forward, and guides the game ball B that has been distributed through the large winning opening upper guide shelf 2426 to the left, and then guides the game ball B to the left, and then guides the game ball B to the left. It can be delivered to 2427. In addition, the large winning opening door 2413 opens the large winning opening 2005 by retreating by driving the attacker solenoid 2414, and the game ball B circulated through the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is used as the large winning opening 2005. Can be accepted. The large winning opening door 2413 closes the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

With the attacker unit 2400 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 is located below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2510 in the center accessory 2500, which will be described later (slightly to the left of the bottom). The second starting port 2004 is located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500, and the grand prize opening 2005 is located below the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500. Further, when attached to the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N exist between the lower end of the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (general winning opening 2001).

Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the game ball B is moved from the stage 2503. Even if it is released, it will not be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (right guide passage 2510) of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Downstream of the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, the upper right left passage 2421, the general winning opening 2001, and the upper right right passage 2422 are opened side by side from the left, and the game ball that flows down the right side of the center accessory 2500. B will enter any of them.

When the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is received by the general winning opening 2001, after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401. , It is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. On the other hand, when the game ball B enters the upper right left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 or the upper right right passage 2422 on the right side without being accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it falls on the upper guide shelf 2424 of the second starting port. Then, it is distributed to the second starting port 2004 side (left side). When the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411, the left end side of the second starting port door 2411 is inclined so as to be low, so that the left end side on the second starting port door 2411 is left. The second start port lower guide shelf 2425 is circulated, and the second start port lower guide shelf 2425 is discharged from the left end to the left. If the second starting port 2004 is opened when the game ball B passes through the guide shelf 2424 above the second starting port, the game ball B is accepted into the second starting port 2004 with a high probability.

After being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. If the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not accepted by the second starting port 2004, it is released to the left large winning opening 2005 side via the guide shelf 2425 below the second starting port. .. When the game ball B released from the upper right left passage 2421 to the second start port upper guide shelf 2424 enters the central right passage 2428 from the right end side of the second start port upper guide shelf 2424, the second start port 2004 , There is no chance of being accepted into the big winning opening 2005 and the first starting opening 2002, and the game is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The second starting port lower guide shelf 2425 is arranged above the large winning opening 2005 and the first starting port 2002, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are located on the left side of the second starting port lower guidance shelf 2425. Has been planted. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the guide shelf 2425 on the lower side of the second starting port flows down to any of the first starting port 2002 side, the big winning opening 2005 side, and the central left passage 2429 side. Become. If the large winning opening 2005 is closed by the large winning opening door 2413 when flowing down to the large winning opening 2005 side, it is guided to the left by the large winning opening door 2413, and the large winning opening lower guide shelf 2427 is pushed. It is released to the left through. When the large winning opening door 2413 that closes the large winning opening 2005 is retracted and the large winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball B that has flowed down from the guidance shelf 2425 below the second starting opening to the large winning opening 2005 side. However, it is accepted in the grand prize opening 2005. After being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

The game ball B that has entered the central left passage 2429 from the lower guide shelf 2425 of the second starting port and the game ball B that has been released to the left from the lower guide shelf 2427 of the grand prize opening are played through the out port 1008. It is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the panel 1100.

The game ball B that has flowed down from the guide shelf 2425 on the lower side of the second starting port to the side of the first starting port 2002 via the obstacle nail N may be received by the first starting port 2002. The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the first start port sensor 3002 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. On the other hand, the game ball B not accepted by the first start port 2002 passes through the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a and is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

[5-8e. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, etc., and slightly above the center of the front view, and is a panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is mounted on the front of the 1110. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. can. Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed to be substantially entirely transparent, and the rear side (decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It is not possible to invade.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view so that the warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter and the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released. It includes a warp outlet 2502 that is open inside, and a stage 2503 that can roll the game ball B discharged from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction and then discharge it into the game area 5a.

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). When attached to 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. The stage 2503 is inclined so that the portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center of the left-right direction and the lowest portion (valley) on both the left and right sides are lowered toward the front. Therefore, the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) at the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is located on the right side of the front component 1000 in a part slightly below the upper right corner in the front view (a part directly below the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 when assembled on the game board 5). A gate space forming portion 2505 that forms a space having a predetermined size through which the game ball B can flow between the rail 1005 and the game ball B from the downstream end of the gate space forming portion 2505 along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in the front view. It is provided with a right guide passage 2510 that allows the vehicle to flow down, guide it slightly to the left near the lower end, and then discharge it downward.

The center accessory 2500 is provided with a gate portion 2003 in the center of the gate space forming portion 2505, and a gate sensor 2506 for detecting a game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is attached. The gate space forming portion 2505 has a size that allows the game ball B to be distributed on both the left and right sides of the gate portion 2003. In the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted above the gate portion 2003.

The right guide passage 2510 is formed so that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510 is located slightly to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. There is.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the distance between the right side of the center of the upper outer peripheral surface and the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is formed so as to be far apart. As a result, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505 and the right guide passage 2510 And always circulate and flow down above the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, in order for the game ball B to pass through the gate portion 2003, it is necessary to hit the game ball to the right, and by hitting the right when the big winning opening 2005 is open, there is a high probability that the game ball will reach the big winning opening 2005. B can be accepted.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a sub-function display unit 2520 in a frame in the upper right corner. The sub-function display unit 2520 has a plurality of full-color LEDs. The sub-function display unit 2520 is interlocked with the normal symbol display, the first special symbol display, and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the gate unit is determined by the lighting / blinking of the LED, the emission color, and the like. The normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B to 2003, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are displayed. It is something to do.

Since the center accessory 2500 is substantially entirely transparent, the flange-shaped portion that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is also transparently formed. Therefore, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear panel plate 1110 is visually recognized from the front through the center accessory 2500 as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 121. be able to. As a result, when assembled on the game board 5, the interrupted portion between the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the table effect unit 2600 described later is made as narrow as possible. It is possible to enhance the continuity between the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 to give a sense of unity.

[5-8f. Table production unit]
Next, the table effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130 and the like. FIG. 127 is a front view of the front effect unit. FIG. 128 is a front view showing a state in which the first pattern is light-emitting decorated in the front effect unit, and FIG. 129 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern is light-emitting decorated in the front effect unit. FIG. 130 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern of the front effect unit, which is different from the present embodiment, is luminescent and decorated.

The front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500, and emits light from the transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 2601 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500 and the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601. For the first pattern decorative substrate 2612 on which a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 are luminescent and decorated with light, and for the second pattern 2620 which is luminescent and decorated by incident light from the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601. 2622 for a second pattern on which a plurality of LEDs 2621 are mounted, and a plurality of diffusing lenses 2623 provided between the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601 and the LED 2621 to diffuse the light from the LED 2621. ing. The LEDs 2611 and LED2621 are full-color LEDs.

The light guide plate 2601 has a first pattern 2610 (see FIG. 128) formed by innumerable uneven upper reflecting portions that reflect only light from above and forward only light from the right direction. It includes a second pattern 2620 (see FIG. 129) formed by a myriad of uneven right-reflecting portions to be reflected. That is, the front effect unit 2600 can display the first pattern 2610 by emitting light when the LED of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern emits light, and when the LED 2621 of the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern emits light, the first pattern 2610 emits light. The two patterns 2620 can be displayed by light emission.

In the light guide plate 2601, the innumerable upper reflecting portions forming the first pattern 2610 and the innumerable right reflecting portions forming the second pattern 2620 are each finely formed with irregularities, and the first When the LED 2611 of the decorative substrate 2612 for the pattern and the LED 2621 of the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern are not emitted, the image looks transparent, and various decorative objects and the effect display device 1600 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side. The effect image and the like displayed on the screen can be visually recognized in good condition.

The plurality of upper reflecting portions forming the first pattern 2610 and the right reflecting portions forming the second pattern 2620 are in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding LED 2611 and LED 2621, respectively. It has a flat surface that extends and is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate 2601. The upper reflection part and the right reflection part are recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The upper reflecting portion and the right reflecting portion reflect the light incident from the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2601. On the other hand, the light incident from the uncorresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621 is reflected in the direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2601. Therefore, only the light from the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621 can reach the eyes of the player located in front of the light guide plate 2601.

A plurality of LEDs 2611 mounted on the lower surface of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and are arranged in four groups of the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d. It is divided. The first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are arranged so as to make two rounds of a predetermined number (here, three) from the left.

As shown in FIG. 128, the first pattern 2610 is a pattern related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The first pattern 2610 is a pattern composed of a plurality of equilateral triangles bounded by an extension of each of the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the upper left diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 (see FIG. 143). .. The first pattern 2610 is a pattern of six large triangles having substantially the same size as an equilateral triangle formed by gathering four contours of one equilateral triangle in the decorative pattern 1150, and the contour of one equilateral triangle in the decorative pattern 1150. It is composed of multiple small triangular patterns that fit inside the. The six large triangle patterns are arranged in a circular shape centered near the center of the game area 5a so that the entire pattern is a hexagon, and a plurality of small triangle patterns surround the six large triangle patterns. Have been placed.

The large triangle pattern of the first pattern 2610 seems to be a state in which a plurality of equilateral triangles of different sizes are eccentric toward the apex side near the center of the game area 5a, and are overlapped so as to decrease in size in order. It is formed in a nice pattern. The small triangular pattern of the first pattern 2610 is formed in a pattern in which the contour lines of the equilateral triangles are arranged concentrically.

The first pattern 2610 has a first pattern portion 2610a composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the first LED 2611a and a second pattern portion 2610b composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the second LED 2611b. And the third pattern portion 2610c composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the third LED 2611c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the fourth LED 2611d. It is configured.

In the first pattern 2610, the large triangle pattern in which a plurality of equilateral triangles having different sizes are superposed has the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c so that the sizes become smaller in order. , The fourth pattern portion 2610d, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c are eccentrically overlapped with respect to the center side of the game area 5a. Occasionally, the small triangle pattern consisting of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles in the first pattern 2610 has the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the first pattern portion 2610c so that the sizes become smaller in order. The four pattern portions 2610d are arranged concentrically in this order.

As shown in FIG. 129, the second pattern 2620 is a pattern having a guide (message) to the player composed of the characters "CHANGE!".

As a second embodiment of the front effect unit 2600, the second pattern 2630 as shown in FIG. 130 may be displayed by light emission. The second pattern 2630 is a pattern related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The second pattern 2630 is a geometric pattern pattern in which the horizontal lines, the upper right diagonal lines, and the upper left diagonal lines forming the decorative pattern 1150 are each extended with a thick width (see FIG. 145).

Next, the light emitting effect by the table effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED 2611a of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the first pattern portion 2610a, and the remaining second pattern portion 2610b and the third pattern portion are emitted. Since the 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, and the second pattern 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the first pattern portion 2610a appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, when the second LED 2611b of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the second pattern portion 2610b, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a and the third are reflected. Since the pattern portion 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, and the second pattern 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern portion 2610b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, when the third LED 2611c of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the third pattern portion 2610c, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a and the second Since the pattern portion 2610b, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, and the second pattern 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the third pattern portion 2610c appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, when the fourth LED 2611d of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the fourth pattern portion 2610d, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a and the second Since the pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the second pattern 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth pattern portion 2610d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

Then, in the first pattern 2610, in the large triangular pattern part, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the first pattern portion 2610a, and the second pattern portion 2610b and the third pattern portion 2610c are eccentrically overlapped toward the center side of the game area 5a, and in the small triangular pattern portion, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c are overlapped. , The fourth pattern portion 2610d, which is concentrically arranged toward the center. Therefore, when the first LED2611a, the second LED2611b, the third LED2611c, and the fourth LED2611d are made to emit light in this order, the first pattern The light is emitted in the order of the part 2610a, the second picture part 2610b, the third picture part 2610c, and the fourth picture part 2610d, and a light emitting effect like an animation that moves from the outside to the center is performed. Can be done.

On the other hand, when the fourth LED 2611d, the third LED 2611c, the second LED 2611b, and the first LED 2611a are made to emit light in this order, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the third pattern portion 2610c, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the first pattern portion 2610a are in that order. It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect such as an animation that emits light and moves from the center side to the outside.

Further, when the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are made to emit light in different colors, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are generated. , Each can emit different colors.

Further, when a plurality of LEDs 2621 of the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern are made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the second pattern 2620, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a and the second pattern are emitted. Since the portions 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern 2620 appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the second pattern 2620 composed of the characters "CHANGE!" Can be made to emit light by the plurality of LEDs 2621.

As described above, according to the front effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns (first pattern portion 2610a, second pattern portion 2610b, third pattern portion 2610c, third pattern portion 2610c) are provided by one light guide plate 2601. Since the four pattern portions 2610d) can be made to emit light, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display an animation or the like, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, since it is possible to easily secure a large space behind the light guide plate 2601, another effect unit can be arranged in the space, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be enhanced. Can be entertained, and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, since the light guide plate 2601 enables the semi-transparent first pattern 2610 to appear in front of the back unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600 to show a light emitting decoration that moves like an animation, a conventional light guide plate is used. It can give a strong impact to the player who is accustomed to the light emission effect, which can surprise and entertain the player, and also make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are patterns related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, the inside and outside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 are continuous. The decoration with a sense of unity can be shown to the player, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

Further, since only the player seated in the front front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emitting display of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 by the light guide plate 2601 well, other games away from the front. It is difficult for a person to see the light emitting display of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620, and it is difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate 2601 is being performed. It is possible to suppress the attention of other players, and it is possible to play the game without worrying about other players, so that the game can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 131 and the like. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and the start opening unit 2100. (1) A first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the start port 2002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting the magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 149). ..

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back lower effect unit 3100 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and a back upper effect unit 3200 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. And the back left effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the back right effect unit 3400 attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. ..

Further, the back unit 3000 receives the game ball B received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, respectively, and is lowered. It is provided with a guide path for discharging into the substrate holder 1200 of the above.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached, near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side (see FIGS. 110 and 111).

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

[5-9a. Backside production unit]
Next, the underside effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the under-back movable decorative body provided in the under-back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the under-back movable decorative body provided in the under-back effect unit as viewed from behind by disassembling. FIG. 134 is a front view showing the movement of the lower back movable decorative body. The underside effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

The under-back effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the under-back movable decorative body 3110 having an equilateral triangle bottom and a triangular pyramid-shaped pointed forward, and the effect display device 1600. The lower back moving arm 3130 (see FIG. 136 and the like) and the lower back moving arm 3130, to which the lower movable decorative body 3110 is attached and both ends in the left-right direction are supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the lower back moving arm 3130 are moved in the vertical direction. It is equipped with an under-back elevating mechanism 3150 to be moved.

The lower back movable decorative body 3110 includes a disk-shaped decorative body base 3111 attached to the lower back moving arm 3130, and a lower back rotation drive motor attached to the rear surface of the decorative body base 3111 with the rotation axis protruding forward. The 3112, the drive gear 3113 attached to the rotating shaft of the under-back rotary drive motor 3112, the transmission gear member 3114 rotated by the drive gear 3113 and rotatably attached to the decorative base 3111, and the decorative body. A rear base 3115 that is rotatably supported by the base 3111 and has a flat plate shape and a substantially regular triangular outer shape, a rear decorative portion 3116 that is attached to the front surface of the rear base 3115 and is rotated by the transmission gear member 3114, and a rear decoration. A middle-stage base 3117 that is arranged in front of the portion 3116 and is rotatably supported by a rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and rotated by a drive gear 3113, and a middle-stage decorative portion 3118 attached to the front surface of the middle-stage base 3117. The front decorative portion 3119, which is arranged in front of the middle decorative portion 3118 and whose rear end is attached to the decorative base 3111 through the middle decorative portion 3118, the middle base 3117, and the rear decorative portion 3116, and the decorative base. The under-back rotation detection sensor 3120, which is attached to the rear surface of the 3111 to detect the rotation position of the rear-stage base 3115, and the under-back rear decoration, which is attached to the front of the decorative body base 3111 to illuminate the rear-stage decorative portion 3116. It is provided with a substrate 3121 and a lower back front decorative substrate 3122 which is attached to the front decorative portion 3119 between the middle base 3117 and the middle decorative portion 3118 to illuminate the middle decorative portion 3118 and the front decorative portion 3119. ing.

The lower back rotation drive motor 3112 is attached to the decorative body base 3111 at a position eccentric from the center of the disk-shaped decorative body base 3111 so that the rotating shaft projects forward. The transmission gear member 3114 is attached to the decorative body base 3111 so that the center of rotation is eccentric with respect to the center of the disk-shaped decorative body base 3111. The transmission gear member 3114 has a spur gear-shaped first gear portion 3114a that meshes with the drive gear 3113, and a spur gear-shaped second gear portion 3114b that integrally rotates on the front side of the first gear portion 3114a. .. The first gear portion 3114a meshes with the drive gear 3113, and the second gear portion 3114b meshes with the rear gear portion 3116d of the rear decoration portion 3116 described later.

The rear-stage base 3115 includes a bearing hole 3115a into which the outer periphery of the disk-shaped decorative base 3111 is slidably inserted, and a detection piece 3115b detected by the under-back rotation detection sensor 3120. The rear base 3115 constitutes the bottom surface of the triangular pyramid-shaped lower back movable decorative body 3110.

The rear-stage decorative portion 3116 is formed in the shape of the rear side when the triangular pyramid pointed forward is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and the three side plate portions having a trapezoidal shape with a narrow front side and a flat plate shape. It is composed of 3116a and an equilateral triangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 3116b connecting the front end sides of the three side plate portions 3116a. The rear-stage decorative portion 3116 is formed in a container shape in which the rear side is open by three side plate portions 3116a and one front plate portion 3116b, and the rear-stage base 3115 is closed at the rear end so that the open rear side is closed. Is installed. Further, the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 has a bearing hole 3116c having a diameter smaller than that of the decorative body base 3111 and penetrating the front and rear at the center of the front plate portion 3116b, and a bearing hole 3116c formed on the rear side of the front plate portion 3116b. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped rear gear portion 3116d that penetrates. The barrel portion 3117b of the middle stage base 3117, which will be described later, is inserted into the bearing hole 3116c so as to be relatively rotatable. The rear gear portion 3116d meshes with the second gear portion 3114b of the transmission gear member 3114. The rear-stage decorative portion 3116 is formed so as to have translucency.

The middle base 3117 is an equilateral triangular and flat plate-shaped main body 3117a smaller than the front plate 3116b of the rear decorative portion 3116, penetrates the center of the main body 3117a, and is cylindrical from the rear surface of the main body 3117a to the rear. It includes a protruding axle cylinder portion 3117b and a spur gear-shaped middle gear portion 3117c formed at the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the axle cylinder portion 3117b. The axle tube portion 3117b is inserted into the bearing hole 3116c of the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 so as to be relatively rotatable. The middle gear portion 3117c meshes with the drive gear 3113.

The outer shape of the middle decorative portion 3118 is formed in an intermediate shape when a triangular pyramid pointed forward is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and three side plate portions 3118a having a trapezoidal shape with a narrow front side and a flat plate shape. It is composed of an equilateral triangular and flat front plate portion 3118b that connects the front end sides of the three side plate portions 3118a. The middle-stage decorative portion 3118 is formed in a container shape in which the rear side is open by three side plate portions 3118a and one front plate portion 3118b, and the middle-stage base 3117 is closed at the rear end so that the open rear side is closed. (Main body 3117a) is attached. Further, the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 is provided with a through hole 3118c that penetrates back and forth at the center of the front plate portion 3118b. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed so as to have translucency.

The outer shape of the front-stage decorative portion 3119 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape narrowed forward. The front-stage decorative portion 3119 includes a columnar front-stage shaft portion 3119a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface of the triangular pyramid. The front shaft portion 3119a is inserted into the shaft cylinder portion 3117b of the middle base 3117 so as to be relatively rotatable, and the rear end is attached to the decorative body base 3111. The front-stage decorative portion 3119 is formed so as to have translucency.

A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction are mounted on the front surface and the rear surface of the back bottom rear decorative substrate 3121. The lower back front decorative substrate 3122 has a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) that irradiate light outward in the normal direction and a plurality of full-color LEDs (top view type) that irradiate light forward. ) And are implemented. The lower back front decorative substrate 3122 is attached to the front shaft portion 3119a of the front decoration portion 3119.

The under-back moving arm 3130 is formed to have a length straddling the opening 3010a (effect display device 1600) of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction, and the under-back movable decorative body 3110 is attached to the center of the front surface. Further, a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted in a row on the front surface of the lower back moving arm 3130. Both ends of the lower back moving arm 3130 in the left-right direction are attached so as to be movable in the up-down direction.

The lower back elevating mechanism 3150 is attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower back elevating mechanism 3150 is a rod-shaped lower back that rotates about one end side by being driven by the lower back elevating drive motor 3151 (see FIG. 149) and the lower back elevating drive motor 3151. It is equipped with an elevating arm. The tip of the lower back lifting arm is connected to the lower back moving arm 3130, and by rotating the lower back lifting arm by the lower back lifting drive motor 3151, the lower back moving arm 3130 is moved via the lower back lifting arm. It can be raised and lowered.

Subsequently, the operation of the underside effect unit 3100 will be described. Under normal conditions, the under-back effect unit 3100 forms a single triangular pyramid by matching the vertices of the triangles of the rear-stage decorative portion 3116, the middle-stage decorative portion 3118, and the front-stage decorative portion 3119 of the under-back movable decorative body 3110. Along with the formation, one apex of the triangle is facing upward. Further, in a normal state, the lower back moving arm 3130 is located at the lower moving end by the lower back raising / lowering mechanism 3150. In this normal state, the pointed apex of the front end of the triangular pyramid in the lower back movable decoration 3110 is located at substantially the same height as the stage 2503 in the center accessory 2500, and most of the lower back movable decoration 3110. Is in a standby position located below the effect display device 1600. In this state, the lower back moving arm 3130 and the lower back elevating mechanism 3150 are located behind the lower left decorative body 3380 of the back left effect unit 3300 and the lower right decorative body 3480 of the back right effect unit 3400, which will be described later. , It is invisible from the front (see FIG. 112 and the like).

In a normal state, when the lower back moving arm 3130 is moved to the upper moving end by the lower back raising / lowering drive motor 3151 via the lower back raising / lowering arm, the upper apex of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is the game area in the front view. It is in the state of the first united position located near the center of 5a (see FIG. 141).

The under-back effect unit 3100 uses the under-back elevating mechanism 3150 to move the under-back movable decorative body 3110 to the most downward standby position and the most upward-moving first united position via the under-back moving arm 3130. It can be raised and lowered freely between. In the present embodiment, the second united position is set, in which the distance of 1/7 of the total moving distance from the standby position to the first united position is moved from the first united position to the standby position side.

Under normal conditions, the under-back effect unit 3100 forms a single triangular pyramid by matching the vertices of the triangles of the rear-stage decorative portion 3116, the middle-stage decorative portion 3118, and the front-stage decorative portion 3119 of the under-back movable decorative body 3110. In addition to being formed, one apex of the triangle is in a state of facing upward (see FIG. 134 (a) and the like). In this state, the detection piece 3115b of the rear-stage base 3115 is detected by the backside rotation detection sensor 3120.

Then, when the drive gear 3113 is rotated by the under-back rotary drive motor 3112 in a state where the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the first united position, the second united position, or the like, the first gear portion is transferred to the drive gear 3113. The transmission gear member 3114 with which the 3114a is engaged rotates in the direction opposite to the drive gear 3113, and is meshed with the second gear portion 3114b of the transmission gear member 3114 via the rear gear portion 3116d of the rear decoration portion 3116. , The rear-stage decorative portion 3116 rotates in the direction opposite to that of the transmission gear member 3114. That is, the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 rotates in the same direction as the drive gear 3113. On the other hand, in addition to the first gear portion 3114a of the transmission gear member 3114, the middle stage gear portion 3117c of the middle stage base 3117 is meshed with the drive gear 3113, and the middle stage decorative portion 3118 is used as the drive gear via the middle stage gear portion 3117c. It rotates in the opposite direction to 3113. Since the front-stage decorative portion 3119 is attached to the decorative body base 3111, the front-stage decorative portion 3119 does not rotate even if the drive gear 3113 is rotated by the lower back rotation drive motor 3112 (FIG. 134 (b). reference).

Therefore, when the lower back rotation drive motor 3112 is driven, the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 rotate in opposite directions while the front-stage decorative portion 3119 remains stopped. In the present embodiment, the gear ratios are set so that when the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 makes one rotation, the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 makes two rotations.

Further, in the under-back effect unit 3100, the under-back movable decorative body 3110 is made to emit light as appropriate by appropriately emitting LEDs mounted on the under-back movable decorative substrate 3121 and the under-back front decorative substrate 3122. It can be light-emitting decorated, and can be light-emitting decorated even while the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 are rotating.

Further, in the under-back effect unit 3100, the under-back moving arm 3130 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs provided on the under-back moving arm 3130, and the plurality of under-back moving arms 3130 can be decorated with light. By causing the LEDs to emit light in order toward the lower back movable decorative body 3110, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect such that light flows to the lower back movable decorative body 3110. Further, by making the plurality of LEDs of the lower back moving arm 3130 emit light in order so as to move away from the lower back movable decorative body 3110, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect such that light flows from the lower back movable decorative body 3110.

[5-9b. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 131 and the like. The back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back-up effect unit 3200 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the effect display device 1600 and the back-up movable decorative body 3210 having a regular triangle bottom and a triangular pyramid shape pointed forward, and the back surface is in the center of the left-right direction. The upper movable decorative body 3210 is attached, and the back upper moving arm 3230 (see FIG. 136 and the like) and the back upper moving arm 3230, which are supported so that both ends in the left-right direction can be moved in the vertical direction, are moved in the vertical direction. It is equipped with a back-up elevating mechanism 3250 for moving.

The upper back movable decorative body 3210 has the same configuration as the lower back movable decorative body 3110. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back-up movable decorative body 3210 is attached to the disk-shaped decorative body base attached to the back-up moving arm 3230 and the rear surface of the decorative body base with the rotation axis protruding forward. The back-up rotary drive motor 3212 (see FIG. 149), the drive gear attached to the rotary shaft of the back-up rotary drive motor 3212, and the drive gear, which are rotated by the drive gear and rotatably attached to the decorative base. The rear decorative part 3216, which is rotatably supported by the transmission gear member and the rear base, which is flat and has a substantially regular triangular outer shape, and which is attached to the front surface of the rear base and is rotated by the transmission gear member. And the middle stage base which is arranged in front of the rear stage decoration part 3216 and is rotatably supported by the rear stage decoration part 3216 and rotated by the drive gear, and the middle stage decoration part 3218 attached to the front surface of the middle stage base. , The front decorative portion 3219, which is arranged in front of the middle decorative portion 3218 and whose rear end is attached to the decorative base through the middle decorative portion 3218, the middle base, and the rear decorative portion 3216, and the decorative base. A back-up rotation detection sensor that is attached to the rear surface to detect the rotation position of the rear-stage base, a back-up rear decoration board that is attached to the front of the decorative body base to illuminate the rear-stage decorative portion 3216, and a middle-stage base. It is attached to the front-stage decorative portion 3219 between the upper-stage decorative portion 3218 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3218, and includes a back-up front decorative substrate for light-emitting decoration of the middle-stage decorative portion 3218 and the front-stage decorative portion 3219.

The outer shape of the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 is formed in the shape of the rear side when the triangular pyramid pointed forward is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction. The rear-stage decorative portion 3116 is formed so as to have translucency. The outer shape of the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 is formed in an intermediate shape when a triangular pyramid sharpened forward is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed so as to have translucency. The outer shape of the front-stage decorative portion 3119 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape narrowed forward. The front-stage decorative portion 3119 is formed so as to have translucency.

A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction are mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the lower back decorative substrate. The front lower back decorative substrate has a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction and a plurality of full-color LEDs (top view type) that irradiate light toward the front. And are implemented.

The back-up moving arm 3230 is formed to have a length straddling the opening 3010a (effect display device 1600) of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction, and the back-up movable decoration 3210 is attached to the center of the front surface. Further, a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted in a row on the front surface of the back-up moving arm 3230. Both ends of the back-up moving arm 3230 in the left-right direction are attached so as to be movable in the up-down direction.

The back-up elevating mechanism 3250 is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back-up elevating mechanism 3250 is a rod-shaped back-up that rotates about one end side by being driven by the back-up elevating drive motor 3251 (see FIG. 149) and the back-up elevating drive motor 3251. It is equipped with an elevating arm. The tip of the back-up lifting arm is connected to the back-up moving arm 3230, and by rotating the back-up lifting arm by the back-up lifting drive motor 3251, the back-up moving arm 3230 is moved via the back-up lifting arm. It can be raised and lowered.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-up effect unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state, the back-up effect unit 3200 forms one triangular pyramid by matching the vertices of the triangles of the rear-stage decorative portion 3216, the middle-stage decorative portion 3218, and the front-stage decorative portion 3219 of the back-up movable decorative body 3210. Along with the formation, one apex of the triangle is facing downward. Further, in a normal state, the back-up moving arm 3230 is located at the upper moving end by the back-up elevating mechanism 3250. In this normal state, the sharp apex of the front end of the triangular pyramid in the back-up movable decoration 3210 is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, and the back-up movable decoration 3210. Most of them are in the standby position located above the effect display device 1600. In this state, the back upper moving arm 3230 and the back upper elevating mechanism 3250 are located behind the back upper left decorative body 3370 of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back upper right decorative body 3470 of the back right effect unit 3400, which will be described later. It is invisible from the front (see FIG. 112 and the like).

In a normal state, when the back-up moving arm 3230 is moved to the lower moving end by the back-up lifting drive motor 3251 via the back-up lifting arm, the lower apex of the back-up movable decoration 3210 is played in the front view. It is in the state of the first united position located near the center of the region 5a (see FIG. 141).

The back-up effect unit 3200 uses the back-up elevating mechanism 3250 to move the back-up movable decorative body 3210 to the most upward position and the first united position to move downward through the back-up movable arm 3230. It can be raised and lowered freely between. In the present embodiment, the second united position is set, in which the distance of 1/7 of the total moving distance from the standby position to the first united position is moved from the first united position to the standby position side.

When the back-up rotation drive motor 3212 was driven in the state where the back-up movable decorative body 3210 was moved to the first united position, the second united position, or the like, the back-up effect unit 3200 stopped the front-stage decorative portion 3219. In the same state, the rear-stage decorative portion 3216 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3218 rotate in opposite directions. In the present embodiment, the gear ratios are set so that when the rear-stage decorative portion 3216 makes one rotation, the middle-stage decorative portion 3218 rotates twice.

Further, in the back-up effect unit 3200, the back-up movable decorative body 3210 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decorative substrate and the back-up front decorative substrate, respectively, and the rear stage. Even when the decorative portion 3216 and the middle decorative portion 3218 are rotating, the light emitting decoration can be performed.

Further, in the back-up effect unit 3200, the back-up movement arm 3230 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs provided on the back-up movement arm 3230, and the back-up movement arm 3230 has a plurality of LEDs. By causing the LEDs to emit light in order toward the back-up movable decoration body 3210, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light flows through the back-up movable decoration body 3210. Further, by causing the plurality of LEDs of the back-up movable arm 3230 to emit light in order so as to move away from the back-up movable decoration body 3210, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light flows from the back-up movable decoration body 3210.

[5-9c. Back left production unit]
Next, the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 and 135. FIG. 135 is a front view showing the movement of the back left movable decorative body of the back left effect unit in the back unit. The back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

The back left effect unit 3300 extends in the vertical direction straddling the triangular pyramid-shaped back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 with the tip directed to the right, and the effect display device 1600, and is movable on the back upper left. The back left moving arm 3330 and the back left moving arm 3330 are movably attached to the decorative body 3310 and the lower left movable decorative body 3320, respectively, and both ends in the vertical direction are supported so as to be movable in the left and right directions. It is equipped with a back left traverse mechanism 3350 that moves in a direction. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 have an equilateral triangular outer shape when viewed from the front. Further, the triangular pyramid-shaped back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are inclined so that their tips are positioned forward in the left-right direction.

Further, the back left effect unit 3300 has a flat plate-shaped back left back decorative plate 3360 extending in the left-right direction in front of the upper end of the back left moving arm 3330 and extending in the left-right direction under the back decoration plate. The upper left decorative body 3370 on which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed, and the lower left on the back on which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed extending in the left-right direction in front of the lower end of the back left moving arm 3330. It is provided with a decorative body 3380.

The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is rotatably attached to the trapezoidal base decoration portion 3311 whose front view shape is narrowed to the right and the right side surface of the base decoration portion 3311, and the tip is directed to the right. A triangular pyramid-shaped front-stage decorative portion 3312, a back upper left rotary drive motor 3313 (see FIG. 149) mounted inside the base-stage decorative portion 3311 for rotating the front-stage decorative portion 3312, and a base stage. The back upper left base decoration substrate which is attached to the inside of the decoration part 3311 to make the base decoration part 3311 emit light, and the front upper decoration part 3312 which is attached to the right side surface of the base decoration part 3311 and emits light decoration. It is equipped with a decorative board on the upper left of the back for making it. The base decoration portion 3311 and the front decoration portion 3312 are formed so as to have translucency.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base decorative portion 3311 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 has a first mounting boss protruding from the center to the rear near the bottom (left side) in a columnar shape and a first mounting on the rear surface. It is equipped with a second mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part to the right of the boss to the rear, and a third mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part above the first mounting boss to the rear. .. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is movably attached to the back left moving arm 3330 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

The lower left movable decorative body 3320 is rotatably attached to the trapezoidal base decorative portion 3321 whose front view shape is narrowed to the right and the right side surface of the base decorative portion 3321, and the tip is directed to the right. A triangular pyramid-shaped front-stage decorative portion 3322, a back left lower rotary drive motor 3323 (see FIG. 149) mounted inside the base-stage decorative portion 3321 for rotating the front-stage decorative portion 3322, and a base stage. The lower left base decorative substrate on the back left, which is attached to the inside of the decorative portion 3321 to illuminate the base decorative portion 3321, and the front decorative portion 3322, which is attached to the right side of the base decorative portion 3321, is luminescently decorated. It is equipped with a back left lower front stage decorative board for making it. The base decoration portion 3321 and the front decoration portion 3322 are formed so as to have translucency.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base decorative portion 3321 of the lower left movable decorative body 3320 on the back has a first mounting boss projecting from the center to the rear near the bottom (left side) in a columnar shape and a first mounting. It is equipped with a second mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part to the right of the boss to the rear, and a third mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part below the first mounting boss to the rear. .. The lower left back movable decorative body 3320 is movably attached to the back left moving arm 3330 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

The back left moving arm 3330 extends in the vertical direction, and is attached to the moving arm base 3331 to which the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are movably attached, and the moving arm base 3331 in the vertical center. It is provided with a back left movable decorative body 3310 and a back left moving drive motor 3332 for moving the back left lower left movable decorative body 3320.

Further, although detailed illustration of the back left moving arm 3330 is omitted, a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the back left moving drive motor 3332 and a vertical direction above the center of the moving arm base 3331 in the vertical direction. An upper slider that is slidably attached to the pinion gear and has an upper rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear, and an upper slider that is slidably attached in the vertical direction below the center of the moving arm base 3331 in the vertical direction. It comprises a lower slider having a lower rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear from the opposite side of the upper rack gear.

In the moving arm base 3331, the upper first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3311 in the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is slidably inserted and the second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3311 slide. It is provided with an upper second slit that can be inserted into the base and an upper third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3311 is slidably inserted. The upper first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The upper second slit extends downward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees about the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then extends downward in a straight line. The upper third slit extends downward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees about the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then extends downward in a straight line.

Further, the moving arm base 3331 has a lower first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3321 in the lower left movable decoration body 3320 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3321. It is provided with a lower second slit that is slidably inserted and a lower third slit that is slidably inserted into the third mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3321. The lower first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The lower second slit extends upward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then extends in a straight line upward. The lower third slit extends upward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then extends linearly upward. The lower first slit, lower second slit, and lower third slit are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit with respect to the horizontal line passing through the center of the rotation axis of the back left moving drive motor 3332. And are formed line-symmetrically.

On the upper slider, the second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3311 in the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is mounted near the upper end. On the lower slider, the second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3321 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 is mounted near the lower end.

The back left transverse mechanism 3350 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back left traverse mechanism 3350 includes a back left traverse drive motor 3351 and a rod-shaped back left traverse arm that rotates about one end side by being driven by the back left traverse drive motor 3351. ing. The tip of the back left traversing arm is connected to the back left moving arm 3330, and by rotating the back left traversing arm by the back left traversing drive motor 3351, the back left moving arm 3330 is moved via the back left traversing arm. It can be rampant.

A hologram sticker is attached to the front surface of the back left back decorative plate 3360. The lower left side of the back upper left decorative body 3370 is attached at substantially the same height as the upper edge of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The upper left side of the lower left decorative body 3380 is attached at substantially the same height as the lower edge of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The front left end of each of the back left back decorative plate 3360, the back upper left decorative body 3370, and the back left lower decorative body 3380 is attached at substantially the same position as the front end of the back box 3010, and the back lower production unit is arranged at the rear. The back-up movement arm 3130 of the 3100, the back-up movement arm 3230 of the back-up effect unit 3200, and the like can be hidden from the front invisible.

Further, the back left back decorative plate 3360 is located behind the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and is a panel in cooperation with the back right back decorative plate 3460 to be described later. The decorative pattern 1150 formed on the board 1110 is made easy to see from the player side (front).

Subsequently, the operation of the back left effect unit 3300 will be described. First, the movements of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 will be described. In a normal state, the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are positive in front view with the base decorative portion 3311 and the base decorative portion 3321, respectively. It is in the state of the rotation position forming a triangle. In this state, when the back upper left rotary drive motor 3313 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower rotary drive motor 3323 of the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 are driven, respectively, the front stage decorative part 3312 and the front stage decorative part are driven respectively. The 3322 can be rotated (see FIG. 137).

Next, the movements of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 with respect to the back left moving arm 3330 will be described. In the initial state of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3331. It is located at the top of each. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 are horizontally arranged, and the base side (left side) of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 extends vertically and the tip is to the right. It is facing (see FIG. 135 (a)). From the initial state, when the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back left movement drive motor 3332 and the upper slider is moved downward via the upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back upper left movable decoration 3310 Since the second mounting boss of the above is mounted on the upper slider, the second mounting boss is pulled downward, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 rotates clockwise around the first mounting boss. Will be done.

At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are below the respective arc-shaped extending portions of the upper second slit and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3331. Sliding to. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the lower end of the arcuate portion in the upper second slit by the upper slider that moves downward, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 moves in the clockwise direction around the first mounting boss. It is in a state of being rotated 30 degrees to, and a state in which the tip is directed to the lower right (second state) (see FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, the lower side of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is in a horizontally extended state.

When the back left upper left movable decoration body 3310 is rotated 30 degrees clockwise by the downward movement of the upper slider and the upper slider is further moved downward by the drive of the back left movement drive motor 3332, the back upper left movable decoration The body 3310 will move downward in a rotating posture. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3331. It slides inside each to the lower end of each and stops moving downward. In this state, the lower side of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is in a state of approaching the center of the moving arm base 3331 in the vertical direction (first state) (see FIG. 135 (c)).

From this state, when the back left moving drive motor 3332 is driven in the opposite direction and the upper slider is moved upward via the pinion gear, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the first state moves in the opposite direction to the above. To return to the initial state.

On the other hand, in the lower left movable decorative body 3320 on the back, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third of the moving arm base 3331. It is located at the bottom of each slit. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the lower left movable decoration body 3320 are arranged horizontally, and the base side (left side) of the lower left movable decoration body 3320 on the back left extends vertically and the tip is to the right. It is facing (see FIG. 135 (a)). From the initial state, when the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back left moving drive motor 3332 and the lower slider is moved upward via the lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 Since the second mounting boss is mounted on the lower slider, the second mounting boss is pulled upward, and the lower left movable decorative body 3320 on the back turns counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. It will move.

At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the lower left movable decorative body 3320 on the back upper side of the lower second slit and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3331 extending in an arc shape, respectively. Sliding to. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the upper end of the arcuate portion in the lower second slit by the lower slider that moves upward, the lower left movable decorative body 3320 on the back left counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. The state is rotated 30 degrees in the direction, and the tip is facing the upper right (second state) (see FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, the upper side of the lower left back movable decorative body 3320 is in a horizontally extended state.

Back left lower movable by moving the lower slider upward With the decorative body 3320 rotated 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction, when the lower slider moves further upward by driving the back left movement drive motor 3332, the back left lower movable The decorative body 3320 moves upward in a rotating posture. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3331. It slides inside each to the upper end of each and stops moving upward. In this state, the upper side of the lower left back movable decorative body 3320 is in a state of approaching the center of the moving arm base 3331 in the vertical direction (first state) (see FIG. 135 (c)).

From this state, when the back left moving drive motor 3332 is driven in the opposite direction and the lower slider is moved downward via the pinion gear, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 in the first state moves in the opposite direction to the above. To return to the initial state.

Since the upper rack gear of the upper slider and the lower rack gear of the lower slider mesh with the pinion gears with the pinion gear rotated by the back left moving drive motor 3332 in between, the pinion is formed by the back left moving drive motor 3332. When the gear is rotated, the upper slider and the lower slider move in different directions up and down. As a result, the movements of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 by the back left movement drive motor 3332 are performed at the same time. Therefore, when the back left movable drive motor 3332 is driven from the initial state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, which are separated from each other vertically and whose tips face to the right, approach each other. After rotating in the direction of moving to the second state, the whole moves in the direction of approaching each other and moves to the first state.

Next, the movement of the back left moving arm 3330 in the back left effect unit 3300 will be described. In the initial state of the back left moving arm 3330, the portion to which the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are attached is located at the moving end to the left. In this state, the back left moving arm 3330 is located on the left side of the effect display device 1600 in the front view. In this state, when the back left traverse arm is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the back left traverse drive motor 3351 of the back left traverse mechanism 3350, the back left movement arm 3330 is moved to the right by the back left traverse arm. It can be moved to the moving end. In the state where the back left moving arm 3330 is located at the right moving end (first state), the parts to which the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are attached are the left and right of the effect display device 1600. It is located at a distance of about 1/3 from the left end side to the right with respect to the width in the direction (see FIG. 141).

As shown in FIG. 135, the back left moving arm 3330 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends to the right, and in the first state where the right end is located at the right moving end, the back lower effect unit 3100 It is located at the center of the back-up movable decorative body 3110 and the back-up movable decoration body 3210 in the left-right direction of the back-up effect unit 3200.

The back left moving arm 3330 can be moved by the back left traversing mechanism 3350 between the position of the initial state which is the left moving end and the position of the first state which is the right moving end. In the present embodiment, the position of the second state is moved by about two-thirds to the right from the position of the initial state with respect to the total movement distance between the position of the initial state and the position of the first state. Is set (see FIG. 140).

In the back left effect unit 3300, in the normal state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are in the initial state, and are lined up at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, respectively. The base sides of the base decoration portion 3311 and the base decoration portion 3321 of the above are vertically extended, and their tips are directed to the right. Further, in the normal state, the back left moving arm 3330 is located at the left moving end in the initial state by the back left traversing mechanism 3350.

In this normal state, the base sides of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, which are in the initial state, are located near the left end in the back box 3010, and the base stage decorative parts 3311 and the base respectively. The stage decoration unit 3321 is located near the left end of the effect display device 1600, and the front stage decoration unit 3312 and the front stage decoration unit 3322 are located in front of the effect display device 1600, respectively. In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are each in the standby position in the initial state (FIG. 112, etc.). See).

As shown in FIG. 135, the back left moving arm 3330 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends to the right, so that the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right from the position in the second state (the first). When it is moved to the position in one state), it comes into contact with the movable decorative body 3210 on the back of the standby position. Therefore, when moving the back left moving arm 3330 to the right moving end (second state), it is necessary to move the back upper movable decorative body 3210 downward from the standby position. Further, when the back left movable ornament 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are directed to the right (initial state) and the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right moving end, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 The tip of the sword abuts on the back-up movable decorative body 3210 which has been moved downward from the standby position. Therefore, it is necessary to move the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 to the position of the first state or the position of the second state so that the tip faces the lower right.

Further, in the initial position of the back left moving arm 3330, the base sides of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are located near the left end in the back box 3010, so that the back left moving is moved. When the drive motor 3332 rotates each of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 in the initial state so as to be in the second state, the base side of each hits the left side surface in the back box 3010. Touch. Therefore, when the back left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 are rotated from the initial state to the second state side by the back left moving drive motor 3332, the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right from the position of the initial state. It is necessary to move it toward you.

In the back left effect unit 3300, the back upper left base decorative board and the back upper left front decorative board of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back left lower base decorative board and the back left lower front decorative board of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320. By appropriately emitting the LEDs mounted on the back left, the movable decoration body 3310 on the upper left of the back and the movable decoration body 3320 on the lower left of the back can be light-emittingly decorated.

In the present embodiment, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are respectively located in the initial state, and the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 are located. The position of is the standby position. Further, the positions of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are each located in the first state. Is the first coalescence position. Further, the positions of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are respectively located in the second state. Is the second coalescence position.

[5-9d. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 131 and the like. The back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

The back right effect unit 3400 extends in the vertical direction across the triangular pyramid-shaped back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 with the tip directed to the left, and the effect display device 1600, and extends in the upper right direction of the back. The back right moving arm 3430 and the back right moving arm 3430 are attached so that the movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 are movable, and both ends in the vertical direction are supported so as to be movable in the horizontal direction. It is provided with a back-right traversing mechanism 3450 that moves the vehicle in the left-right direction (see FIG. 138). The upper right back movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 have an equilateral triangular outer shape when viewed from the front. Further, the triangular pyramid-shaped back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are inclined so that their tips are positioned forward in the left-right direction.

Further, the back right effect unit 3400 has a flat plate-shaped back right back decorative plate 3460 extending in the left-right direction in front of the upper end of the back right moving arm 3430 and extending in the left-right direction under the back decoration plate. The back right decorative body 3470 in which a three-dimensional truss-shaped decoration is formed, and the back right in which a three-dimensional truss-shaped decoration is formed extending in the left-right direction in front of the lower end of the back right moving arm 3430. It includes a lower decorative body 3480 and.

The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is rotatably attached to the trapezoidal base decoration portion 3411 whose front view shape is narrowed to the left and the right side surface of the base decoration portion 3411, and the tip is directed to the left. A triangular pyramid-shaped front-stage decorative portion 3412, a back upper right rotary drive motor 3413 (see FIG. 149) mounted inside the base-stage decorative portion 3411 for rotating the front-stage decorative portion 3412, and a base stage. The back upper right base decoration substrate which is attached to the inside of the decoration part 3411 to make the base decoration part 3411 emit light, and the front decoration part 3412 which is attached to the left side surface of the base decoration part 3411 and emits light decoration. It is equipped with a decorative board on the upper right side of the back for making it. The base decorative portion 3411 and the front decorative portion 3412 are formed so as to have translucency.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base decorative portion 3411 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 has a first mounting boss protruding from the center to the rear near the bottom (right side) in a columnar shape and a first mounting on the rear surface. It is equipped with a second mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part to the left of the boss to the rear, and a third mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part above the first mounting boss to the rear. .. The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is movably attached to the back right moving arm 3430 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

The lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is rotatably attached to the trapezoidal base decoration portion 3421 whose front view shape is narrowed to the left and the left side surface of the base decoration portion 3421, and the tip is moved to the left. A triangular pyramid-shaped front-stage decorative portion 3422, a back right lower right rotary drive motor 3423 (see FIG. 149), which is mounted inside the base-stage decorative portion 3421 and for rotating the front-stage decorative portion 3422, It is attached to the inside of the base decoration part 3421 and is attached to the lower right base decoration substrate on the back right for making the base decoration part 3421 emit light, and is attached to the left side surface of the base decoration part 3421 and is attached to the front decoration part 3422. It is equipped with a decorative substrate on the lower right side of the back for luminescent decoration. The base decorative portion 3421 and the front decorative portion 3422 are formed so as to have translucency.

Although detailed illustration of the base decoration portion 3421 of the lower right movable decorative body 3420 on the back is omitted, the first mounting boss and the first mounting boss projecting from the center to the rear near the bottom (right side) in a columnar shape on the rear surface. It is equipped with a second mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part to the left of the mounting boss to the rear, and a third mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part below the first mounting boss to the rear. There is. The lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is movably attached to the back right moving arm 3430 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

The back right moving arm 3430 extends in the vertical direction and is attached to the moving arm base 3431 to which the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 are movably attached, and the moving arm base 3431 in the vertical direction center. It is equipped with a back right movable decorative body 3410 and a back right moving drive motor 3432 for moving the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back right moving arm 3430 has a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the back right moving drive motor 3432 and a vertical direction above the center of the moving arm base 3431 in the vertical direction. The upper slider, which is slidably mounted to and has an upper rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear, and the upper slider, which is slidably mounted vertically below the center of the moving arm base 3431 in the vertical direction, are mounted on the upper slider. It comprises a lower slider having a lower rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear from the opposite side of the upper rack gear.

In the movable arm base 3431, the upper first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3411 in the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is slidably inserted and the second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3411 slide. It is provided with an upper second slit that can be inserted into the base and an upper third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3411 is slidably inserted. The upper first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The upper second slit extends downward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees about the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then extends downward in a straight line. The upper third slit extends downward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees about the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then extends downward in a straight line.

Further, the moving arm base 3331 has a lower first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3421 in the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3421. The lower second slit is slidably inserted, and the lower third slit is slidably inserted into the third mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3421. The lower first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The lower second slit extends upward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then extends in a straight line upward. The lower third slit extends upward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then extends linearly upward. The lower first slit, lower second slit, and lower third slit are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit with respect to the horizontal line passing through the center of the rotation axis of the back right moving drive motor 3432. And are formed line-symmetrically.

On the upper slider, the second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3411 in the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is mounted near the upper end. On the lower slider, the second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3421 in the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is mounted near the lower end.

The back right traversing mechanism 3450 is attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back right traverse mechanism 3450 includes a back right traverse drive motor 3451 and a rod-shaped back right traverse arm that rotates about one end side by being driven by the back right traverse drive motor 3451. ing. The tip of the back right traversing arm is connected to the back right moving arm 3430, and by rotating the back right traversing arm by the back right traversing drive motor 3451, the back right moving arm 3430 is moved via the back right traversing arm. It can be rampant.

A hologram sticker is attached to the front surface of the back right back decorative plate 3460. The lower right side of the back upper right decorative body 3470 is attached at substantially the same height as the upper edge of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The upper right side of the lower right decorative body 3480 is attached at substantially the same height as the lower edge of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The front end of each of the back right back decorative plate 3460, the back upper right decorative body 3470, and the back right lower decorative body 3480 is attached at substantially the same position as the front end of the back box 3010, and the back lower effect is arranged at the rear. The back-up movement arm 3130 of the unit 3100, the back-up movement arm 3230 of the back-up effect unit 3200, and the like can be hidden from the front invisible.

Further, the back right back decorative plate 3460 is located behind the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and cooperates with the back left back decorative plate 3360 to display the panel plate 1110. The decorative pattern 1150 formed in is made easy to see from the player side (front).

Subsequently, the operation of the back right effect unit 3400 will be described. First, the movements of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 will be described. In a normal state, the front-stage decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the front-stage decorative portion 3422 of the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 are viewed from the front with the base-stage decorative portion 3411 and the base-stage decorative portion 3421, respectively. It is in the state of the rotation position forming an equilateral triangle. In this state, when the back upper right rotary drive motor 3413 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower rotary drive motor 3423 of the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are driven, respectively, the front stage decorative portion 3412 and the front stage are respectively driven. The decorative portion 3422 can be rotated (see FIG. 137).

Next, the movements of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 with respect to the back right moving arm 3430 will be described. In the upper right back movable decorative body 3410, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3431. It is located at the top of each. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 are horizontally arranged, and the base side (right side) of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 extends vertically and the tip is on the left side. It is suitable. From the initial state, when the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back right movement drive motor 3432 and the upper slider is moved downward via the upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 Since the second mounting boss is mounted on the upper slider, the second mounting boss is pulled downward, and the movable decorative body 3410 on the upper right of the back rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. It will move.

At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are below the respective arc-shaped extending portions of the upper second slit and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3431. Sliding to. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the lower end of the arcuate portion in the upper second slit by the upper slider that moves downward, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. It is in a state of being rotated 30 degrees in the direction, and a state in which the tip is directed to the lower left (second state) (see FIG. 139). In this state, the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is in a horizontally extended state.

Back upper right movable by moving the upper slider downward With the decorative body 3410 rotated 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction, when the upper slider moves further downward by driving the back right movement drive motor 3432, the back upper right is movable. The decorative body 3410 will move downward in a rotating posture. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3431. It slides inside each to the lower end of each and stops moving downward. In this state, the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is in a state of approaching the center of the moving arm base 3431 in the vertical direction (first state) (see FIG. 141).

From this state, when the back right moving drive motor 3432 is driven in the opposite direction and the upper slider is moved upward via the pinion gear, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the first state moves in the opposite direction to the above. To return to the initial state.

On the other hand, in the lower right back movable decorative body 3420, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower first slit of the moving arm base 3431. It is located at the lower end of each of the three slits. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the lower right back movable decoration body 3420 are horizontally arranged, and the base side (right side) of the lower right back movable decoration body 3420 extends vertically and the tip is on the left. Looking towards you. From the initial state, when the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back right moving drive motor 3432 and the lower slider is moved upward via the lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back right lower movable decorative body is formed. Since the second mounting boss of 3420 is mounted on the lower slider, the second mounting boss is pulled upward, and the movable decorative body 3420 at the lower right of the back moves clockwise around the first mounting boss. It will rotate.

At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 form a portion extending in an arc shape in the lower second slit and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3431, respectively. Slide upwards. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the upper end of the arcuate portion in the lower second slit by the lower slider that moves upward, the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 rotates clockwise around the first mounting boss. The state is rotated 30 degrees in the direction, and the tip is facing the upper left (second state) (see FIG. 139). In this state, the upper side of the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is in a horizontally extended state.

When the lower right movable decorative body 3420 is rotated 30 degrees in the clockwise direction by moving the lower slider upward, and the lower slider is further moved upward by the drive of the back right moving drive motor 3432, the lower right back is moved. The movable decorative body 3420 will move upward in a rotating posture. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 are the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3431. It slides inside each of them to the upper end of each, and the upward movement stops. In this state, the upper side of the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is in a state of approaching the center of the moving arm base 3431 in the vertical direction (first state) (see FIG. 141).

From this state, when the back right moving drive motor 3432 is driven in the opposite direction and the lower slider is moved downward via the pinion gear, the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 in the first state moves in the opposite direction to the above. And return to the initial state.

Since the upper rack gear of the upper slider and the lower rack gear of the lower slider mesh with the pinion gears with the pinion gear rotated by the back right moving drive motor 3432 in between, the pinion is formed by the back right moving drive motor 3432. When the gear is rotated, the upper slider and the lower slider move in different directions up and down. As a result, the movements of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 by the back right movement drive motor 3432 are performed at the same time. Therefore, when the back right movement drive motor 3432 is driven from the initial state, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420, which are separated from each other vertically and whose tips face to the left, have their respective tips facing each other. After rotating in the approaching direction to enter the second state, the whole moves in the direction of approaching each other to enter the first state.

Next, the movement of the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right effect unit 3400 will be described. In the initial state of the back right moving arm 3430, the portion to which the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are attached is located at the moving end to the right. In this state, the back right moving arm 3430 is located on the right side of the effect display device 1600 in the front view. In this state, when the back right traverse arm is rotated clockwise by the back right traverse drive motor 3451 of the back right traverse mechanism 3450 in the front view, the back right movement arm 3430 is moved to the left by the back right traverse arm. It can be moved to the edge. In the state where the back right moving arm 3430 is located at the left moving end (first state), the portion to which the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are attached is the effect display device 1600. It is located at a distance of about 1/3 from the right end side to the left with respect to the width in the left-right direction (see FIG. 141).

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back right moving arm 3430 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends to the left, and in the first state where the left end is located at the left moving end, the back lower effect unit. It is located in the center of the back-up movable decoration body 3110 and the back-up movable decoration body 3210 of the 3100 and the back-up effect unit 3200 in the left-right direction.

The back right moving arm 3430 can be moved by the back right traversing mechanism 3450 between the position of the initial state which is the right moving end and the position of the first state which is the left moving end. In the present embodiment, the position of the second state is moved by about two-thirds to the left from the position of the initial state with respect to the total movement distance between the position of the initial state and the position of the first state. Is set (see FIG. 140).

In the back right effect unit 3400, in the normal state, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are in the initial state, and are arranged in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. The base sides of the base decoration portion 3411 and the base decoration portion 3421 are vertically extended, and the tips of the base decoration portions are facing left. Further, in the normal state, the back right moving arm 3430 is located at the right moving end in the initial state by the back right traversing mechanism 3450.

In this normal state, the base sides of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420, which are in the initial state, are located near the right end in the back box 3010, and the base stage decoration portions 3411 and the respective base stage decoration parts 3411 and The base decoration unit 3421 is located near the right end of the effect display device 1600, and the front decoration unit 3412 and the front decoration unit 3422 are located in front of the effect display device 1600, respectively. In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are each in the standby position in the initial state (FIG. 112). Etc.).

Since the back right moving arm 3430 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends to the left, the back right moving arm 3430 is moved from the position of the second state to the moving end to the left (the position of the first state). Then, it comes into contact with the movable decorative body 3210 on the back of the standby position. Therefore, when moving the back right moving arm 3430 to the left moving end (second state), it is necessary to move the back upper movable decorative body 3210 downward from the standby position. Further, when the back right moving arm 3430 is moved to the left moving end with the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 facing to the left (initial state), the back upper right movable decorative body 3430 is moved. The tip of the 3410 abuts on the back-up movable ornament 3210 that has been moved downward from the standby position. Therefore, it is necessary to move the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 to the position of the first state or the position of the second state so that the tip faces the lower left.

Further, in the initial position of the back right moving arm 3430, the base sides of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are located near the right end in the back box 3010, so that the back right When the movable drive motor 3432 rotates the movable decorative body 3410 on the upper right side of the back and the movable decorative body 3420 on the lower right side in the initial state so as to be in the second state, the base side of each is the right side surface in the back box 3010. Contact. Therefore, when the back right moving drive motor 3432 rotates the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 from the initial state to the second state side, the back right moving arm 3430 is moved from the position of the initial state. It is necessary to move it to the left.

In the back right effect unit 3400, the back upper right base decorative board and the back upper right front decorative board of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower base decorative board and the back right lower front of the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. By appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate to emit light, the movable decorative body 3410 on the upper right of the back and the movable decorative body 3420 on the lower right of the back can be light-emittingly decorated.

In the present embodiment, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, the back right lower movable decoration body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are respectively located in the initial state, and the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration The position of the body 3420 is the standby position. Further, when the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, the back right lower movable decoration body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are each located in the first state, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 The position of is the first united position. Further, when the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, the back right lower movable decoration body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are located in the second state, respectively, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 The position of is the second united position.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main movable effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 136 to 142 and the like. FIG. 136 shows that the back lower movable decorative body of the back lower effect unit is raised from the standby position and the back lower moving arm is moved from the normal state to the back left lower movable decorative body and the back right effect unit. The height is the same as the decorative body, and the back upper movable decorative body of the back upper effect unit is lowered from the standby position, and the back upper moving arm is moved to the back upper left movable of the back left effect unit and the back upper right movable of the back right effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state which is the same height as a decorative body. In FIG. 137, the back lower movable decoration body, the back upper movable decoration body, the back upper left movable decoration body, the back left lower movable decoration body, the back upper right movable decoration body, and the back right lower movable decoration body are rotated in the state of FIG. 136. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of being.

Further, FIG. 138 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back left moving arm of the back left effect unit and the back right moving arm of the back right effect unit are moved to the second state from the normal state. FIG. 139 shows the front surface of the game board showing a state in which the back upper left movable decoration body, the back left lower movable decoration body, the back upper right movable decoration body, and the back right lower right movable decoration body are moved from the state of FIG. 138 to the second state. It is a figure. In FIG. 140, the back left moving arm is moved to the right and the back right moving arm is moved to the left from the normal state, and the back upper left movable decoration, the back right lower movable decoration, and the back left lower movable decoration are shown. It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the movable decorative bodies on the upper right of the back are rotated so as to face each other, and then the effect image is displayed on the effect display device. FIG. 141 shows the second combined position of the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back right lower movable decoration from the normal state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state moved to. FIG. 142 first combines the back lower movable decoration body, the back upper movable decoration body, the back upper left movable decoration body, the back left lower movable decoration body, the back upper right movable decoration body, and the back right lower movable decoration body from the state of FIG. 141. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state moved to a position.

The game board 5 includes a panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side slope 2300, an attacker unit 2400, a center accessory 2500, and the like that partition the rear end of the game area 5a. Since it is formed to be substantially transparent as a whole, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through them. , Back lower left movable decoration unit 3110 of back lower production unit 3100, back upper movable decoration 3210 of back upper production unit 3200, back upper left movable decoration 3310 of back left production unit 3300, back left lower movable decoration 3320 , Back left back decorative plate 3360, back upper left decorative body 3370, back left lower decorative body 3380, back right production unit 3400 back upper right movable decorative body 3410, back right lower movable decorative body 3420, back right back decorative plate 3460, back upper right The decorative body 3470, the lower right decorative body 3480 on the back, and the like can be clearly seen.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 of the lower back effect unit 3100 is in the standby position, and the back left lower decorative body 3380 of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back side. It faces forward from between the back right lower right decorative body 3480 of the right production unit 3400. Further, in the normal state, the back upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper effect unit 3200 is in the standby position, and the back upper left decorative body 3370 of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400 are back. It faces forward from between the upper right decorative body 3470. Further, in the normal state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 of the back left effect unit 3300 are in the standby position, and the tips are arranged vertically separated from each other toward the right. I'm out. Further, in the normal state, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 of the back right effect unit 3400 are in the standby position, and the tips are separated vertically with the tip toward the left. They are lined up.

In this normal state, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 are arranged vertically symmetrically on both the upper and lower ends of the effect display device 1600 at positions to the left of the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. At the same time, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are positioned upward with respect to the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. Are arranged vertically and vertically around the center, and are arranged symmetrically with each other on both left and right ends of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the player side (front) in a good state.

In the game board 5, the back unit 3000 is produced according to the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery, which are drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The back upper movable decoration body 3110 of the unit 3100, the back upper movable decoration body 3210 of the back upper production unit 3200, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 of the back left production unit 3300, and the back of the back right production unit 3400. The upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 perform a predetermined movable effect.

Specifically, as a movable effect using the back lower effect unit 3100 and the back upper effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, the back lower moving arm 3130 is moved by the back lower elevating mechanism 3150 from the normal state. , The lower left movable decorative body 3320 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 are moved to the same height as the tips (vertices) facing the center side in the left-right direction, and the upper back moving arm 3230 is moved by the upper back elevating mechanism 3250. , The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are moved to the same height as the tips (vertices) facing the center side in the left-right direction. As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 are located in front of the effect display device 1600 so as to block the effect image of the effect display device 1600. The movement of the movable decorative body 3210 on the back can be noticed. In addition, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back right lower movable decoration body 3420, and the back lower right movable decoration body 3110 are combined with the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back upper movable decoration body 3110 by the back lower left movable decoration body 3130. The body 3210 and the back-up moving arm 3230 can be made to appear to be connected to each other, and the player can be reminded of a feeling that something fun will happen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 137, the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 of the back-bottom movable decorative body 3110 are connected by the back-bottom rotary drive motor 3112, and the rear-stage decorative portion 3210 of the back-up movable decorative body 3210 is driven by the back-up rotary drive motor 3212. The decorative portion 3216 and the middle decorative portion 3218 are formed by the back upper left rotary drive motor 3313 and the back left lower rotary drive motor 3323. The front upper right rotary drive motor 3413 and the back right lower right rotary drive motor 3423 rotate the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the front decorative portion 3422 of the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420, respectively. As a result, the inside of the game area 5a can be made to feel lively, and the player can be entertained.

At this time, when a plurality of LEDs arranged in a row on the back lower movement arm 3130 and the back upper movement arm 3230 are turned on, blinking, and extinguished so as to flow toward the center side in the left-right direction, the left and right back upper left movable decorations are formed. It seems that energy is injected into the back upper movable decoration 3210 and the back lower movable decoration 3110 from the 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration 3420, and they are rotating. The production can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when a plurality of LEDs arranged in a row on the back-up movement arm 3130 and the back-up movement arm 3230 are turned on, blinking, and extinguished so as to flow outward in the left-right direction, the back-up movable decorative body 3210 and the back-up movable Energy is released from the decorative body 3110, and the left and right back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are rotated. Can be shown to others. By such an effect, it is possible to make the player feel that the expected value is increasing, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

Further, as a movable effect using the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400, for example, as shown in FIG. 138, the back left moving arm 3330 is placed in the second state by the back left traversing mechanism 3350 from the normal state. At the same time, the back right traversing mechanism 3450 moves the back right moving arm 3430 to the position of the second state. As a result, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 move to the center side in the left-right direction while facing each other. Because it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 by blocking the effect image of the effect display device 1600, the player is given the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration. The movement of the body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 can be noticed, and the movements can be enjoyed.

Then, from the state of FIG. 138, as shown in FIG. 139, the back left upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 are moved from the initial state to the second state by the back left movement drive motor 3332, and the back right movement is performed. The drive motor 3432 moves the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 from the initial state to the second state. As a result, the tip of the back upper left movable decoration 3310 and the tip of the back right lower movable decoration 3420 are in a state where the tip of the back left lower movable decoration 3320 and the tip of the back upper right movable decoration 3410 face each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game. At this time, the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. The first-stage decorative portion 3422 may be rotated, or the effect display device 1600 may display an effect image that connects the tips of the respective ends.

Further, as a movable effect using the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400, as shown in FIG. 140, the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right and the back right moving arm 3430 is moved to the left from the normal state. While moving each direction, the back upper left movable decoration 3310 and the back right lower movable decoration 3420, and the back left lower movable decoration 3320 and the back upper right movable decoration 3410 are rotated so as to face each other from the initial state. Then, the effect display device 1600 is made to display an effect image that connects the tips of each. As a result, an "X" -shaped production image is displayed so as to connect the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 facing each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game. At this time, the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. The first-stage decorative portion 3422 of the above may be rotated respectively.

Further, as a movable effect using the back bottom effect unit 3100, the back top effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400, for example, as shown in FIG. 141, from the normal state to the back bottom. Move the movable decorative body 3110, the movable decorative body 3210 on the back, the movable decorative body 3310 on the upper left of the back, the movable decorative body 3320 on the lower left of the back, the movable decorative body 3410 on the upper right of the back, and the movable decorative body 3420 on the lower right of the back to the second united position. .. As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are constant. Since they are arranged so as to gather on the circumference of the hexagon at intervals, it is possible to give an impact to the player, and the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, "big hit game"). Can be made to think that may occur.

In addition, when changing from the normal state to the state of the second united position as shown in FIG. 141, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 , The back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 may be moved to the second united position all at once. Alternatively, the players may be moved to the second coalescing position in an appropriate order, and by moving to the second coalescing position in order, the player may be moved to the second coalescing position in each movement. Not only can it be thrilling and exciting, but it can also perform a variety of movable effects, making it difficult for players to get bored.

Then, from the state of FIG. 141, as shown in FIG. 142, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, And the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is moved to the first united position. As a result, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are densely arranged. Since it can be assembled to form one large hexagonal decoration, it can have a strong impact on the player, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn are "big hits". You can be confident that there is one and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the state of the first united position as shown in FIG. 142, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration The body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 may be moved to the first united position all at once from the second united position or from the normal standby position. Alternatively, the players may be moved to the first coalescing position in an appropriate order, and by moving to the first coalescing position in order, the player may be moved to the first coalescing position in each movement. Not only can it be thrilling and exciting, but it can also perform a variety of movable effects, making it difficult for players to get bored.

Subsequently, the main light emitting effect on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145 and the like. FIG. 143 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the first pattern is luminescent and decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 144 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the second pattern is luminescent and decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the second pattern of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from that of FIGS. 143 and 144 is light-emitting and decorated. The game board 5 has a game panel 1100 and a front unit according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, which are drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The front effect unit 2600 of 2000 performs a predetermined light emission effect.

Specifically, as a light emitting effect using the game panel 1100, the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is light-emitting and decorated by the light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130. As a result, a geometric pattern consisting of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles is luminescently decorated on the rear side of the area where the game ball B is distributed in the game area 5a, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. The light emission effect can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the table effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000, for example, as shown in FIG. 143, a plurality of light emitting effect mounted on the first pattern decorative substrate 2612 arranged above the light guide plate 2601. Of the LEDs 2611, the first LED 2611a is made to emit light, and only the first pattern portion 2610a forming a part of the first pattern 2610 is made to emit light and be decorated. As a result, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) are displayed in front of the effect display device 1600, so that nothing happens to the player. It can make you think. Further, the second LED 2611b of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, and only the second pattern portion 2610b forming a part of the first pattern 2610 is made to emit light. As a result, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns having a size similar to that of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and different in size from the first pattern portion 2610a are displayed in front of the effect display device 1600. It can make the player think that something will happen.

Further, the third LED 2611c of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, and only the third pattern portion 2610c forming a part of the first pattern 2610 is made to emit light. As a result, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns having a size similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in front of the effect display device 1600 and having a size different from that of the first pattern portion 2610a and the second pattern portion 2610b. Is displayed, it is possible to make the player think that something will happen. Further, the fourth LED 2611d of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, and only the fourth pattern portion 2610d forming a part of the first pattern 2610 is made to emit light. As a result, it is similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in front of the effect display device 1600, and has a size different from that of the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c. Since the patterns of multiple equilateral triangles are displayed, it is possible to make the player think that something will happen.

Further, in the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are repeatedly emitted in this order, and the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern are repeatedly emitted. The part 2610c and the fourth pattern part 2610d are repeatedly luminescent and decorated in this order. As a result, in the first pattern 2610, in the large triangular pattern part, the first pattern part 2610a, the second pattern part 2610b, the third pattern part 2610c, the fourth pattern part 2610d, the first pattern part 2610a, and the second pattern The portion 2610b and the third pattern portion 2610c are eccentrically overlapped with each other toward the center side of the game area 5a, and in the small triangular pattern portion, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion are overlapped. Since 2610c and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are arranged concentrically toward the center, it is possible to show a light emitting effect like an animation that moves from the outside to the center. Not only can the player be surprised and entertained, but the player can be made to think that there is something good, and the player's expectation for the game can be raised.

Further, the fourth LED 2611d, the third LED 2611c, the second LED 2611b, and the first LED 2611a are repeatedly emitted in this order to form the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the third pattern portion 2610c, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the first pattern portion 2610a. Repeat in order to make it emit light. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect such as an animation that moves from the center side to the outside, so that the player can be surprised and entertained, and at the same time, the player can be surprised. It is possible to make people think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game.

When the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are made to emit light, they may be made to emit light in different colors. As a result, the rainbow-colored luminescent decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. At the same time, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern can be shown. The switching of the part 2610d becomes easy to understand, and the animation effect can be exerted more strongly.

In the first pattern 2610, after the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are simultaneously luminescent and decorated, the first pattern portion 2610a and the second pattern portion are displayed. The 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d may be luminescently decorated in this order. As a result, initially, the stationary first pattern 2610 is light-emittingly displayed, so that the player can be made to think that it is a light-emitting decoration by the conventional light guide plate, and then the first picture 2610 is displayed. By moving like an animation, the player can be greatly surprised, and the effect of the light guide plate 2601 can be further enhanced.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the front effect unit 2600, for example, as shown in FIG. 144, a plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 arranged on the right side surface side of the light guide plate 2601 emit light. The second pattern 2620 is light-emitting and decorated. As a result, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a guide (message) for the player consisting of the characters "CHANGE!" Is displayed as the second pattern 2620, so that the guide gives the player a chance. It is possible to suggest the arrival of the game, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the front effect unit 2600 different from FIGS. 143 and 144, for example, as shown in FIG. 145, it is mounted on the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 arranged on the right side surface side of the light guide plate 2601. The plurality of LEDs 2621 are made to emit light, and the second pattern 2630 is made to emit light and be decorated. As a result, the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the upper left diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 are each extended by a thick width to form the second pattern 2630 of the geometric pattern. However, since the decoration is luminescent, the decoration with a sense of unity between the outside and the inside of the center accessory 2500 can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

The light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the light emitting decoration of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the front effect unit 2600 may be performed at the same time. As a result, the luminescent decoration having a sense of unity between the outside and the inside of the center accessory 2500 can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

Subsequently, the effect of combining the movable effect and the light emitting effect on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148. In FIG. 146, the first pattern is luminescently decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit, and the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, and the back upper right movable decoration, It is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the movable decorative body on the lower right of the back is moved to the second united position. In FIG. 147, the first pattern is luminescently decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit, and the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, and the back upper right movable decoration, It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the movable decorative body on the lower right of the back is moved to the first united position. In FIG. 148, the second pattern is luminescently decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from that of FIG. 147, and the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, and the back left lower movable decoration are displayed. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back right lower right movable decorative body are moved to the first united position.

The game board 5 has the above-mentioned movable effect and light emission effect according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, which are drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The production is performed by appropriately combining and. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 146, the light guide plate 2601 of the front effect unit 2600 is decorated with the first pattern 2610 by light emission, and the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, and the back upper left movable The decorative body 3310, the lower left movable decorative body 3320, the upper right movable decorative body 3410 on the back, and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 on the back are moved to the second united position.

As a result, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are placed in front of the movable decorative body 3110. Since the parts of the six large triangles in one pattern 2610 are located, the movable decorations 3110 under the back, the movable decorations 3210 on the back, and the movable decorations 3310 on the upper left of the back depend on the parts of the large triangles in the first pattern 2610. , Back left lower movable decoration body 3320, back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and back right lower movable decoration body 3420 can be decorated, back lower left movable decoration body 3110, back upper movable decoration body 3210, back upper left movable decoration body 3310. , The back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 can be changed in appearance. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player an impression different from the state shown in FIG. 141, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of effects, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and the state shown in FIG. 141. Compared with, it is possible to make people think that better things will happen, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game.

Further, as an effect in which the above movable effect and the light emitting effect are appropriately combined, for example, as shown in FIG. The 3110, the back upper left movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration 3420 are moved to the first united position. As a result, the large triangular pattern of the first pattern 2610, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and Since the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is overlapped in the front and back, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3320. The decorative body 3410 and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 on the back can be decorated to change their appearance. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player an impression that is clearly different from the state shown in FIG. 142, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery drawn. Can be convinced that is a "big hit" and enhance the interest in the game.

Further, as an effect of appropriately combining the above movable effect and the light emitting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 148, the light guide plate 2601 of the front effect unit 2600 of the embodiment different from the above is light-emitting-decorated with the second pattern 2630. At the same time, the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 are first combined. Move to position. As a result, in front view, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. In front of the adjacent pattern 2630, the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the upper left diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 are extended, and the second pattern 2630 of the geometric pattern of the thick line is extended. Since it is luminescent and decorated, it is possible to make it difficult to see between them by the second pattern 2630, and it is possible to make it difficult to see between them. It is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the decorative mode formed by the movable decorative body 3410 on the upper right side of the back and the movable decorative body 3420 on the lower right side of the back, and it is possible to assist the movable effect and further enhance the effect.

In addition, in the state where the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 (second pattern 2630) of the light guide plate 2601 are light-emitting and decorated, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper upper movable decorative body 3210 are moved to the rear thereof. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 may be appropriately luminescent. As a result, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are luminescently decorated. Since the light from the light guide plate 2601 reaches the player's eyes through the light guide plate 2601, it is possible to show the player a high-intensity luminescent decoration that cannot be achieved by the light guide plate 2601 alone, which can entertain the player. can.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emitting effect as described above can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns to the player by appropriately combining a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive to drive various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. Mouth sensor 2402, general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, general winning opening sensor 3001, gate sensor 2506 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, large winning opening 2005 Detection signals from the large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the game area 5a, the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are input via the main control I / O ports, respectively. NS.

The main control MPU outputs a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 by outputting a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals. Or, from the main control I / O port, the status display of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display, the normal hold display, the first special symbol display, the first special hold number display, the second special symbol display, A drive signal is output to the second special hold number indicator, round indicator, etc.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the grand prize opening sensor 2403 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. On the other hand, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 B detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, the large winning opening sensor 2403 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, performs launch control by the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout and the launch solenoid 542, and launches by ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, the error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, the ball tank 552, and the tank rail during maintenance. It is provided with a ball pulling switch for discharging the game ball B in the 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball pulling operation. ..

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "counting switch error" has occurred (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and launch. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 149, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the above.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above, and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5. , The drive motor of the game board 5 or the drive motor of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side drive light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided in the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port In addition to transmitting from to the door frame 3 side, or transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Back lower movable decoration 3110, back upper movable decoration 3210, back upper left movable decoration 3310, back left lower movable decoration 3320, back upper right movable decoration 3410, and back right lower right in the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5. Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the moving position, rotating position, and the like of the movable decorative body 3420 are input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, the detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and has a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, and a top side provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 1720 of the game board 5 are a plurality of serials different from the display commands. It is performed by the input / output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The effect drive board 1720 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or is used as a received game board side lighting / blinking command. Based on this, a lighting signal or a blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board 1720 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided in the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and each drive motor provided in the game board 5. And so on.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an execution signal is input from VDP and the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various characters on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a length of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction in order from left to right when viewed from the front. Driven by sub-scanning performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially performs one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as the main scan. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the effect display device 1600 is based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the handle 182 is rotated, the stronger the striking force can be. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while being in contact with the plurality of obstacle nails N. It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp outlet 2502.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is released from the center in the left-right direction to the front. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first start port 2002 with a high probability because the portion is located directly above the first start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the first start port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side slope 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, it may be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike). , Enters the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505 of the center accessory 2500, and passes through the gate portion 2003 arranged in the space with a certain probability. The game ball B circulating in the space where the gate portion 2003 is arranged is discharged from the right guide passage 2510 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400.

Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510, the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged, and when the game ball B is received by the general winning opening 2001 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

By the way, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit". , The closed second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. .. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are transferred from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2520 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, a lottery is drawn when the game ball B is accepted at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction)", " There are "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second big hit", etc.

The special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are the special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special fluctuation time has elapsed, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by allowing the large winning opening 2005 to accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. can.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes from is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is reached. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern that makes the game balls B unacceptable in a closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round). Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is finished, the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "second big hit", after the big winning opening 2005 enables the game ball B to be accepted in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time) is set as an advantageous game state. ) Is generated. This ST is to maintain a probabilistic change or a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2520 are directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and suggests the special lottery result as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

In addition, the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2520 are set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. A player participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the front effect unit 2600, the back unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back surface It is possible to perform light emission production, movable production, etc. by appropriately using the production unit 3200, the back left production unit 3300, the back right production unit 3400, etc., and the player can be entertained by various productions. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 is displayed to that effect.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the table effect unit of the table unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the back side effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back side effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, the back right effect unit 3400, and the like. It is possible, and it is possible to entertain the player by various productions, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The first picture 2610 and the second picture 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 of the light guide plate 2601 in the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment are the specific picture of the present invention, and the first picture 2610 in the present embodiment is the variable picture of the present invention. The second pattern 2630 in the present embodiment has the outline pattern of the present invention, the back-up movable decoration body 3110 of the back-down effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment, and the back-up movable decoration body 3210 of the back-up effect unit 3200. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 of the back left effect unit 3300, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 of the back right effect unit 3400 are the movable decorative bodies of the present invention. Back lower rear decorative substrate 3121, back lower front decorative substrate 3122, back upper rear decorative substrate, back upper front decorative substrate, back upper left base decorative substrate, back upper left front decorative substrate, back left lower base decorative substrate, The LEDs mounted on the back left lower front decorative board, the back upper right base decorative board, the back upper right front decorative board, the back right lower base decorative board, and the back right lower front decorative board are the light emitting means of the present invention. , Each is equivalent.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. The first united position and the second united position are the specific positions of the present invention, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body. The first united position of the 3410 and the lower right back movable decoration body 3420 is the first specific position of the present invention, the lower back movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body. The second united positions of the body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 correspond to the second specific positions of the present invention, respectively.

[9. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, under normal conditions, the back-up movable decoration body 3110 of the back-down effect unit 3100 and the back-up movable decoration unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 of the back left effect unit 3300, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 of the back right effect unit 3400 are located near the outer periphery of the game area 5a. In the standby position, each of them is separated from each other and dispersed, and the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right The movable decorative body 3410 and the movable decorative body 3420 at the lower right of the back can decorate the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2610 and the second pattern of the light guide plate 2601 of the front effect unit 2600 in the front unit 2000. The 2630 is not displayed by light emission, the light guide plate 2601 is in a transparent state, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a is visually recognized in a good state. be able to.

Further, in this standby position, the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body Since the bodies 3420 are separated from each other, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3410. The player is required to gather the decorative bodies 3420 at the first united position or the second united position as specific positions to form a predetermined decorative mode (hexagonal first decorative mode or annular second decorative mode). It is possible to make it difficult to recall, and it is possible to increase the impact when gathered. In this normal state, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are When moving from the standby position to the first union position or the second union position, the first decoration mode and the second decoration mode are formed in the vicinity of the center of the game area 5a, so that the first decoration mode and the second decoration mode are formed. The appearance can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's attention.

Then, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are first combined. When the first pattern 2610 as a specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601 is made to emit light while being moved to the second united position, the first pattern 2610 causes the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, and the back upper left. The decorations of the movable decorative body 3310, the lower left movable decorative body 3320, the upper right movable decorative body 3410 on the back, and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 on the back can be changed, and the light emitting part in the first pattern 2610 (first). By changing the pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d), the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, Since the decoration of the first decoration mode and the second decoration mode formed by the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 can be variously changed, the back bottom Movable decoration 3110, back upper movable decoration 3210, back upper left movable decoration 3310, back left lower movable decoration 3320, back upper right movable decoration 3410, back right lower movable decoration 3420 It is possible to make the player less bored, and at the same time, it can have a strong impact on the player, making the player think that there is something good for the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, in the light guide plate 2601, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d of the first pattern 2610 are made to emit light in order to emit a moving pattern. Since it can be displayed, the movement of the first pattern 2610 can make the player feel strange, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the movement of the first pattern 2610 can make the player feel strange. Can be entertained, and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are first combined. When the second pattern 2630 is made to emit light as a specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601 while being moved to the position or the second united position, the second pattern 2630 causes the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the upper left back. The outer circumferences of the movable decoration body 3310, the lower left movable decoration body 3320, the upper right back movable decoration body 3410, and the lower right back movable decoration body 3420 can be emphasized, and the movable decoration body is enlarged by the second pattern 2630. In addition to being able to show, the second pattern 2630 allows the back lower movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back right lower right. Since the movable decorative bodies 3420 can be connected to each other, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right The lower movable decorative body 3420 and the second pattern 2630 can form one big decoration and give a strong impact to the player, making the player think that there is something good for the game. It is possible to raise the expectation for.

Further, the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 are in the standby position. At this time, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are made to emit light as the specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601, and the first united position and the second united position are set near the center of the game area 5a. Decorate the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 in the second united position. Since the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are displayed by emitting light near the center of the game area 5a, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are good from the player side (front). It is possible to visually recognize the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 to the player. Then, with the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 emitting light, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration When the body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 are moved from the standby position to the first combined position or the second combined position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the upper left movable decorative body 3310 are moved. , Because the player can see the effect that the lower left movable decorative body 3320, the upper right back movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 are integrated with the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630. , It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are first united positions. Or, in the state of being moved to the second united position, the back lower rear decorative board 3121, the back lower front decorative board 3122, the back upper rear decorative board, the back upper front decorative board, the back upper left base decorative board, the back upper left front decoration It is mounted on the board, the back left lower base decorative board, the back left lower front decorative board, the back upper right base decorative board, the back upper right front decorative board, the back right lower base decorative board, and the back right lower front decorative board. When the first picture 2610 and the second picture 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are made to emit light while the LED is emitted, the first picture 2610 and the second picture 2630 are indirect light, whereas the LED is a light close to direct light. Because of this, the brightness of the LED part in the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 is high, so the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 and the LED produce a light emission effect that could not be seen with a conventional pachinko machine. Can be shown to the player, can give a strong impact to the player, and can make the player think that there is something good, and raise the expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the back lower rear decorative board 3121, the back lower front decorative board 3122, the back upper rear decorative board, the back upper front decorative board, the back upper left base decorative board, the back upper left front decorative board, the back left lower base decorative board, the back By emitting LEDs mounted on the lower left front decorative board, the upper right base decorative board on the back, the upper right front decorative board on the back, the lower right base decorative board on the back, and the lower right front decorative board on the back, the lower back Since the movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 can be light-emitting decorated. Back lower movable decoration body 3110, back upper movable decoration body 3210, back upper left movable decoration body 3310, back left lower movable decoration body 3320, back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and back right lower movable decoration body 3420 shine brightly on the back. The lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 can be made to stand out. Similar to the pachinko machine, the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420. The light emitting decoration can be entertained by the player.

Further, since a plurality of movable decorative bodies that move from the standby position to the first united position or the second united position are provided, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are provided. And a plurality of movable decorative bodies including the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are moved separately from the standby position to the first united position and the second united position. Therefore, after moving one movable decorative body to the first united position or the second united position, it depends on whether or not the next movable decorative body moves to the first united position or the second united position. It is possible to excite the player and entertain the player, and at the same time, by appropriately combining the timings at which each movable decorative body moves to the first united position and the second united position, a plurality of movable parts can be moved. It is possible to make the movable effect by the decorative body various, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. Movement, light emission of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 on the light guide plate 2601, and the back lower rear decorative board 3121, the back lower front decorative board 3122, the back upper rear decorative board, the back upper front decorative board, the back upper left base Step decorative board, back upper left front decorative board, back left lower base decorative board, back left lower front decorative board, back upper right base decorative board, back upper right front decorative board, back right lower base decorative board, back right lower By appropriately combining the light emission of the mounted LED on the decorative substrate in the first stage, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest. can.

Further, by the light emitting display of the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, And since the space between the back right lower movable decorations 3420 is complemented with each other, the back lower movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, and the back Even if the upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 do not come into contact with each other and there is a gap, the gap can be hidden by the second pattern 2630. Improve the movement accuracy of each of the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration 3420 so as to come into contact with each other. There is no need to move the back lower movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration 3420. 3110, upper back movable decoration 3210, upper left movable decoration 3310, lower left movable decoration 3320, upper right back movable decoration 3410, and lower right back movable decoration It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the moving mechanism of the body 3420.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pair of the back-up movable decoration body 3110 of the back-down effect unit 3100 and the back-up movable decoration body 3210 of the back-up effect unit 3200 as a pair of first movable decorations. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 of the back left effect unit 3300 as the second movable decorative body, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 of the back right effect unit 3400 are Each of them is in a standby position, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 face each other in the vertical direction around the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view. In addition, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 face each other in the left-right direction around the effect display device 1600. Therefore, since each of them is separated from each other and dispersed, the back lower movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration The body 3410 and the movable decorative body 3420 at the lower right of the back can decorate the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be displayed from the player side. It can be visually recognized in a good state to entertain the player with the effect image.

Further, in the standby position, the pair of back left moving arms 3330 and back right moving arm 3430, and the pair of back lower moving arms 3130 and back upper moving arm 3230 are separated from each other and the back lower movable decorative body 3110. , Back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back right lower movable decorative body 3420, and a game area 5a in front view (effect display device). Since it is located near the outer periphery of 1600), the back left moving arm 3330, the back right moving arm 3430, the back lower moving arm 3130, and the back upper moving arm 3230 display the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be easily seen from the player side (front) without being interrupted, and the effect image can be enjoyed in a good state.

Then, the pair of lower back moving arms 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3230 are brought close to each other to move the pair of lower back movable decorations 3110 and the upper back movable decorations 3210 to the first united position as a predetermined position, and the pair. The back left moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm 3430 are brought close to each other to form a pair of back upper left movable decorations 3310 and back left lower movable decorations 3320, back upper right movable decorations 3410, and back right lower movable decorations 3420. When the movable decorative body 3110 and the movable decorative body 3210 on the back are moved to the first united position as a connecting position, they are densely gathered together in the center of the game area 5a and in front of the effect display device 1600 in the front view. It forms one large first decorative aspect. As a result, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable so as to block the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. Since the decorative body 3410 and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 move to form the first large hexagonal decorative mode, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3110 are used for the player. 3210, back upper left movable decoration 3310, back left lower movable decoration 3320, back upper right movable decoration 3410, and back right lower movable decoration 3420 can be noticed, and back lower movable decoration 3110, back upper movable The movements of the decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 (plural movable decorative bodies) can be enjoyed. The appearance of a large first decorative aspect in the center of the game area 5a in front of the effect display device 1600 can surprise the player and make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

Further, the pair of the back lower movable arm 3130 and the back upper movable arm 3230 put the pair of the back lower movable decoration body 3110 and the back upper movable decoration 3210 into the second position between the standby position as a predetermined position and the first united position. Along with moving to the combined position, a pair of back left movable arm 3330 and back right moving arm 3430 make a pair of back upper left movable decoration 3310 and back left lower movable decoration 3320, back upper right movable decoration 3410 and back right lower movable decoration. When the 3420 is moved to the second united position between the standby position and the first united position as the position for connecting the pair of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back lower movable decoration Body 3110, back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are ring-shaped along the periphery of the hexagon. Since the assembled second decorative mode is formed, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right It is possible to show the player a decoration that is clearly different from the first decoration mode of the large hexagon in which the lower movable decorations 3420 are densely assembled. Different decoration modes by the decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 enable various productions, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the deterioration of the interest. Can be made to. Further, from the state of the standby position, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body. In the effect of moving the 3420 to the first united position via the second united position, it depends on whether or not the 3420 is moved from the standby position to the second united position and whether or not the 3420 is moved from the second united position to the first united position. The player can be thrilled and thrilled in each scene, and the multi-stage production can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, the six back lower movable ornaments 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are in standby positions. When moving from the first united position or the second united position, in the standby position, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, Since the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 are separated from each other, the back lower right movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 It is possible to make it difficult for the player to remind the player that the movable decorative body 3410 on the upper right side of the back and the movable decorative body 3420 on the lower right side of the back are assembled to form the first decorative mode and the second decorative mode. In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are located at the second position from the standby position. When moving to the first united position or the second united position, the back upper left movable decoration body 3110 and the back upper movable decoration body 3210 move without changing their orientations, and the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body The 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are designed to change their directions and move, and the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration body are moved. In the 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420, the orientations are different between the standby position and the first united position. Therefore, in the standby position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the back The player is informed that the upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 move to the first united position to form the first decoration mode. On the other hand, it can be difficult to recall.

More specifically, under normal conditions, the lower back movable decoration body 3110 has one apex facing upward, and the upper back movable decoration body 3210 has one apex facing downward, and the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and In the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, one apex (tip) is directed to the right, and in the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420, one apex (tip) is directed to the left. Then, in the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210, in the same posture, they move upward and downward to be positioned at the first combined position and the second combined position, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310. And in the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the tips facing to the right move to the first united position and the second united position while changing their postures so as to face the lower right and the upper right, respectively, and the back upper right movable decorative body In the 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420, the tips facing the left move to the first united position and the second united position while changing their postures so as to face the lower left and the upper left, so that they move to each other. Movable ornaments arranged vertically and horizontally in different directions move to the first united position so that their vertices gather at one point, or to the second united position so that they line up in a ring, and one large decoration. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to remind the player that it forms a body.

For this reason, the six back lower movable decorations 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration When the 3420 is moved from the standby position to the first united position or the second united position, they move unexpectedly by the player, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact to the player. At the same time, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, in each of the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, respectively. Is a movement different from the movement between the standby position and the first coalescing position (second movement, more specifically, in the lower back movable decoration 3110 and the upper back movable decoration 3210, the movement rotating around an axis extending back and forth. , Back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back right lower movable decorative body 3420 can rotate around an axis extending to the left and right). Lower movable decorative body 3110, back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are in the standby position and the first combined position. By making the second movement at an appropriate position between and, it is possible to show a different effect from the effect of showing the player the first decorative mode of the first united position and the second decorative mode of the second united position. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored by various productions, and it is possible to make the player more entertaining, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are respectively triangular pyramids. It is formed in a shape and has a specific sharp apex (the apex facing upward of the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the apex facing downward of the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable). Since it has an acute angle (tip) facing to the right of the decorative body 3320, and an acute angle (tip) facing the left of the movable decorative body 3410 on the upper right of the back and the movable decorative body 3420 on the lower right of the back. The back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 are combined with the standby position. When moving to or from the position, or when making a second movement, the player is asked to move the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the lower left back movable decorative body. It is possible to make it easier to recognize that the 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration 3420 are moving, and the back lower movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, and the back upper left movable decoration can be easily recognized. It is possible to entertain the movements of the 3310, the lower left movable decorative body 3320, the upper right movable decorative body 3410 on the back, and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 on the back, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 are paired back left. Since the moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm 3430 and the pair of back lower moving arms 3130 and the back upper moving arm 3230 are provided, respectively, the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, and the back upper left movable decoration Because the body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 can be moved separately when they are assembled at the first united position or the second united position. , Back lower movable decorative body 3110, back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and back right lower movable decorative body 3420 in order to move (move) By appropriately selecting the above, the variation of the movable effect can be made more diverse, and the various movable effect makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the deterioration of the interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine (parrot machine) formed by fusing the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body The shape of each of the 3420's front views is shown as an equilateral triangle, but it is not limited to this, for example, "quadrangle", "hexagon", "octagon", "fan", "star". It may be "shape", etc.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lower back moving arm 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3230 are each provided with one movable decorative body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lower back moving arm 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3130 and The back-up moving arm 3230 may be provided with a plurality of movable decorative bodies. Further, in the above embodiment, the back left moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm each provided with two movable ornaments are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the back left moving arm 3330 and the back are not limited to this. The right moving arm 3430 may be provided with one or more movable ornaments.

Further, in the above embodiment, the movable decorative bodies (the back lower movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210) of the back lower effect unit 3100 and the back upper effect unit 3200 are united with the standby position in the same posture. The movement between the position and the position is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the backside effect unit 3100 and the backside effect unit 3200, the posture changes between the standby position and the first united position. It may be used as a decoration.

Further, in the above embodiment, the movable decorative bodies of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400 (back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back right lower movable decorative body 3410, and back right lower movable decorative body 3310. The decorative body 3420) is shown to move between the standby position and the first united position by changing the posture, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400. , It may be a movable decorative body that moves between the standby position and the first united position without changing the posture.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1120 Panel holder 2600 Table production unit 2601 Light guide board 2610 First pattern (variable pattern, specific pattern)
2610a 1st pattern part 2610b 2nd pattern part 2610c 3rd pattern part 2610d 4th pattern part 2611 LED
2612 Decorative board for the first pattern 2621 LED
2622 Decorative substrate for 2nd pattern 2623 Diffusing lens 2630 2nd pattern (contour pattern, specific pattern)
3000 Back unit 3100 Back bottom production unit 3110 Back bottom movable decorative body (movable decorative body)
3121 Decorative substrate after backing (light emitting means)
3122 Back bottom front decorative substrate (light emitting means)
3200 Back-up production unit 3210 Back-top movable decorative body (movable decorative body)
3300 Back left production unit 3310 Back upper left movable decorative body (movable decorative body)
3320 Back left lower left movable decorative body (movable decorative body)
3400 Back right production unit 3410 Back upper right movable decorative body (movable decorative body)
3420 Lower right back movable decorative body (movable decorative body)

Claims (2)

It has a storage area of a predetermined volume that can store the game balls supplied from the island equipment where the game machines are installed inside the partition wall of a predetermined height.
In a game machine in which a game ball stored in the storage area is paid out as a prize ball by a payout device via a predetermined ball passage.
The non-reservoir area outside the partition wall portion is provided with an induction inclined portion where game balls not stored in the storage area can be located.
The guided inclined portion is inclined downward from the front to the rear of the gaming machine so that the gaming ball located on the guided inclined portion does not stay on the guided inclined portion.
The ball passage has a rectifying unit that acts to reduce the number of stages of game balls that are distributed in a plurality of upper and lower stages.
The game ball that flows down due to the downward inclination of the induction inclined portion is configured so that it can fall into the ball passage from above the ball passage upstream of the rectifying portion.
The position where the gaming ball flowing down due to the downward inclination of the induction inclined portion falls into the ball passage and the rectifying portion are both located to the right of the storage area in the rear view of the gaming machine.
The induction inclined portion is provided at a position along the outside of the partition wall portion in a top view of the gaming machine.
The ball passage includes a main guide portion having a width corresponding to a predetermined number of rows.
The storage area has a main bottom surface portion that forms the main bottom surface of the storage area, and is characterized in that the gaming ball is dropped from the main bottom surface portion into the main guidance portion. Pachinko machine. It has a storage area of a predetermined volume that can store the game balls supplied from the island equipment where the game machines are installed inside the partition wall of a predetermined height.
In a game machine in which a game ball stored in the storage area is paid out as a prize ball by a payout device via a predetermined ball passage.
The non-reservoir area outside the partition wall portion is provided with an induction inclined portion where game balls not stored in the storage area can be located.
The guided inclined portion is inclined downward from the front to the rear of the gaming machine so that the gaming ball located on the guided inclined portion does not stay on the guided inclined portion.
The ball passage has a rectifying unit that acts to reduce the number of stages of game balls that are distributed in a plurality of upper and lower stages.
The game ball that flows down due to the downward inclination of the induction inclined portion is configured so that it can fall into the ball passage from above the ball passage upstream of the rectifying portion.
The position where the gaming ball flowing down due to the downward inclination of the induction inclined portion falls into the ball passage and the rectifying portion are both located to the right of the storage area in the rear view of the gaming machine.
The induction inclined portion is provided at a position along the outside of the partition wall portion in a top view of the gaming machine.
The ball passage includes a guide portion having a width corresponding to a predetermined number of rows outside the storage area.
The bottom surface of the storage area is composed of a plurality of bottom surfaces having different heights.
A gaming machine characterized in that the lowest bottom surface of the plurality of bottom surfaces is continuous with the bottom surface of the guidance portion.

Images